Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Dieci - Hercules

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 266
At a glance
Powered by AI
The key takeaways are that this manual provides operation and maintenance instructions for a telescopic lift called Hercules. It discusses safety regulations, vehicle identification, introduction and guarantee.

The purpose of this manual is to provide instructions for operating and maintaining a telescopic lift called Hercules safely.

The manual discusses acknowledging safety regulations in Chapter B.

Hercules

OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hercules - INGLESE

AXH1139/UK
Servizio Assistenza Tecnica - Via E. Majorana, 2-4 - 42027 Montecchio Emilia (RE) ITALY Via E. Majorana, 2-4
Tel. +39 0522 869611 - Fax S.A.T. +39 0522 869744 42027 Montecchio Emilia (RE) ITALY
www.dieci.com - E-mail: service@dieci.com Tel. +39 0522 869611 Fax +39 0522 869744 ATTENTION: ALWAYS KEEP A COPY OF THIS MANUAL
www.dieci.com - E-mail: info@dieci.com ON THE MACHINE AT THE OPERATOR’S DISPOSAL
EVERY TELESCOPIC LIFT IS ACCOMPANIED BY:
A COPY OF THIS MANUAL,
A COPY OF THE ENGINE USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL DRAWN-UP BY THE MANUFACTURER
A COPY OF THE USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL RELATIVE TO EVERY DEVICE OR EQUIPMENT
WITH WHICH THIS VEHICLE IS SUPPLIED.

THESE MANUALS ARE WRITTEN BY THE RESPECTIVE PRODUCT SUPPLIERS, OR REPRODUCED


ACCURATELY AND IN FULL BY DIECI S.r.l. WITH THEIR SPECIFIC AUTHORISATION: THEY MAY INCLUDE
ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS WRITTEN BY DIECI S.r.l.

DIECI S.r.l. does not consider itself liable for damage


deriving from the use of non original spare parts

UFF. ASSISTENZA E RICAMBI


Tel. ++ 39 0522-869611 - FAX ++ 39 0522-869744

www.dieci.com DEPARTAMENTO DE ASISTENCIA Y REPUESTOS


Tel. ++ 39 0522-869611 - FAX ++ 39 0522-869744
Dieci s.r.l.
VIA E. MAJORANA, 2-4 BUREAU ASSISTANCE ET PIÈCES DE RECHANGE
42027 - MONTECCHIO E. (RE) - ITALY Tel. ++ 39 0522-869611 - FAX ++ 39 0522-869744
TEL. ++39 0522-869611
FAX ++39 0522-869744 SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS DEPARTMENT
e-mail: info@dieci.com Tel. ++ 39 0522-869611 - FAX ++ 39 0522-869744
Cap. Soc. Int. Vers. € 10.000.000,00
Reg.Impr. R.E. N. 01283560686 - R.E.A. R.E. N. 204278

1 Dieci 2 Dieci 3 Uff.Tec 4 Devid 5 MTKeR 7 Digigraph 8 Globe 9 06/2011 10 AXH1139/IT Ed.2
C.F. 01283560686 - P.I. 01682740350

USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Issue 2 - 06/2011 Hercules 120.10
Translation of the Original Instructions Hercules 160.10
Traduzione delle istruzioni originali
Hercules 210.10
Cod.: AXH1139/UK
WARNINGS:
All documentation provided constitutes and integral and important part of the product and must always be available to users;
users must carefully read the aforementioned documentation before using the machine.
Improper, incorrect, or irrational use of the vehicle or the accessories with which it is equipped as well as modification to its
physical structure or functioning is prohibited.

THE TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION OF THE CONTENTS OF


THIS MANUAL OR ANY MULTI-MEDIA ENCLOSURES IS PROHIBITED:
Dieci S.r.l. WILL PROTECT THE OWNERSHIP RIGHTS OF THESE MATERIALS

ATTENTION: A COPY OF THIS MANUAL MUST ALWAYS BE IN THE VEHICLE FOR THE DRIVER'S REFERENCE.
Model E.T. HERCULES

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FOR EDITING PURPOSES


CHAPTER “A”
INTRODUCTION, GUARANTEE, VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................A/3
GUARANTEE............................................................................................................................................................A/4
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION......................................................................................................................................A/6
TELESCOPIC LIFT IDENTIFICATION......................................................................................................................A/7
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY.......................................................................................................................A/9

CHAPTER “B”
SAFETY REGULATIONS
ACKNOWLEDGING SAFETY REGULATIONS.........................................................................................................B/2
GENERAL WARNINGS.............................................................................................................................................B/3
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING........................................................................................................................................B/4
INSPECTING THE VEHICLE....................................................................................................................................B/4
Ensuring the vehicle is clean......................................................................................................................B/5
FIRST AID.................................................................................................................................................................B/6
DRIVER’S CAB.........................................................................................................................................................B/7
DRIVING AUTHORISATIONS...................................................................................................................................B/8
STARTING UP THE VEHICLE..................................................................................................................................B/9
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS............................................................................................................................B/9
SAFE OPERATION.................................................................................................................................................B/10
LOAD HANDLING...................................................................................................................................................B/14
PARKING THE VEHICLE........................................................................................................................................B/15
TEMPORARY HALT................................................................................................................................................B/15
ROAD TRAVEL ......................................................................................................................................................B/16
ROAD TRAVEL (INSTRUCTIONS).........................................................................................................................B/16
HOISTING THE MACHINE.....................................................................................................................................B/17
TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE..........................................................................................................................B/17
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE................................................................................................................B/18
VIBRATIONS...........................................................................................................................................................B/18
NOISE.....................................................................................................................................................................B/19
PERFORMING MAINTENANCE WORK SAFELY..................................................................................................B/20
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE.................................................................................................................................B/23
STORING THE MACHINE / PROLONGED INACTIVITY........................................................................................B/24
PREPARATION AFTER PROLONGED INACTIVITY..............................................................................................B/24
FIRE PREVENTION................................................................................................................................................B/25
BATTERIES.............................................................................................................................................................B/26
STARTING UP WITH AUXILIARY BATTERIES......................................................................................................B/27
Connecting the cables and starting the engine...............................................................................B/28
TIGHTENING WHEEL NUTS..................................................................................................................................B/29
TYRES....................................................................................................................................................................B/29
STORING DANGEROUS FLUIDS..........................................................................................................................B/31
CONTACT WITH DANGEROUS FLUIDS...............................................................................................................B/31
RECOMMENDED FUEL SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................B/32
ECOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS........................................................................................................................B/34
WASTE DISPOSAL.................................................................................................................................................B/34
CHECKING THE WIND SPEED..............................................................................................................................B/36
Allowed surface pressure........................................................................................................................B/37
SAFETY DEVICES..................................................................................................................................................B/38
DRIVING CAB.........................................................................................................................................................B/41
ROPS-FOPS CAB...................................................................................................................................................B/41
LOAD TABLES........................................................................................................................................................B/42
USING THE LOAD TABLES AND BOOM INDICATORS........................................................................................B/43
LOAD HANDLING...................................................................................................................................................B/46
SAFETY STICKERS ..............................................................................................................................................B/50
Model E.T. HERCULES

CHAPTER C
USER INSTRUCTIONS AND GETTING TO KNOW the VEHICLE
GENERAL WARNINGS............................................................................................................................................................ C/3
LEARNING ABOUT THE VEHICLE’S PARTS – FOUR MOVEMENT FOOT STABILISERS....................................... C/4
cab............................................................................................................................................................................................. C/6
GETTING IN AND OUT OF THE CAB................................................................................................................................... C/8
DOOR OPENING CONTROLS............................................................................................................................................... C/8
INTERNAL DOOR OPENING CONTROLS.......................................................................................................................... C/8
OPENING THE DOOR WINDOW ......................................................................................................................................... C/9
REAR WINDOW........................................................................................................................................................................ C/9
EMERGENCY EXIT.................................................................................................................................................................. C/9
Upper ROOF......................................................................................................................................................................... C/10
internal cab lamp........................................................................................................................................................... C/10
ASHTRAY................................................................................................................................................................................. C/10
MAX POWER 180W............................................................................................................................................................... C/10
COURTESY COMPARTMENT............................................................................................................................................. C/11
TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POCKET........................................................................................................................ C/11
STEERING WHEEL (adjustment)................................................................................................................................. C/11
SEAT......................................................................................................................................................................................... C/12
SEAT BELTS............................................................................................................................................................................ C/13
INTERIOR CAB INSTRUMENTS......................................................................................................................................... C/14
CENTRAL DASHBOARD PILOT LIGHTS.......................................................................................................................... C/15
CENTRAL DASHBOARD - INSTRUMENT USE............................................................................................................... C/16
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD - FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCHES................................................................. C/17
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD - FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCHES................................................................. C/18
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD - SELECTOR SWITCHES- PUSH-BUTTONS..................................................... C/19
IGNITION SWITCH................................................................................................................................................................. C/20
DASHBOARD LEVERS......................................................................................................................................................... C/22
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVERS................................................................................................................................................. C/23
PEDALS.................................................................................................................................................................................... C/24
PARKING BRAKE................................................................................................................................................................... C/25
FAST/SLOW SPEED COMMAND........................................................................................................................................ C/26
EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON............................................................................................................................................ C/27
SPIRIT LEVEL......................................................................................................................................................................... C/27
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL DECK LEVELING....................................................................................................................... C/28
MANIPULATOR....................................................................................................................................................................... C/29
ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE......................................................................................................................................................... C/30
VERIFICATION ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE............................................................................................................................ C/31
DISCONNECTING THE LIMITING DEVICE...................................................................................................................... C/31
RADIO CONTROL (optional).......................................................................................................................................... C/33
STEERING SELECTOR........................................................................................................................................................ C/34
REVOLVING LIGHT SWITCH............................................................................................................................................... C/36
Cab front light SWITCH (OPTIONAL)....................................................................................................................... C/36
Cab BACK light SWITCH (OPTIONAL).......................................................................................................................... C/36
FRONT WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH.......................................................................................................... C/37
EMERGENCY LIGHTS SELECTOR.................................................................................................................................... C/37
MANUAL ELECTRONIC ACCELERATOR.......................................................................................................................... C/37
Boom head light SWITCH (OPTIONAL)..................................................................................................................... C/38
Boom WORK light SWITCH (OPTIONAL).................................................................................................................... C/38
ACCESSORY QUICK ATTACHMENT FROM CAB (OPTIONAL)................................................................................... C/39
CAB INSIDE VENTILATION.................................................................................................................................................. C/40
AIR RECIRCULATION........................................................................................................................................................... C/41
AIR CONDITIONING (OPTIONAL)...................................................................................................................................... C/41
TOWING THE VEHICLE........................................................................................................................................................ C/42
CATALYTIC PURIFIER (OPTIONAL)................................................................................................................................... C/47
WATER PURIFIER (OPTIONAL).......................................................................................................................................... C/47
“CENTRAL DASHBOARD” INTEGRATED DEVICES
CENTRAL DASHBOARD....................................................................................................................................................... C/53
lcd DISPLAY.......................................................................................................................................................................... C/54
PUSH-BUTTONS.................................................................................................................................................................... C/55
INITIAL INSPECTION OF DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTATION ................................................................................... C/56
GENERAL ALARM WARNING LIGHT................................................................................................................................. C/57
SERVICE.................................................................................................................................................................................. C/60
ERROR LIST........................................................................................................................................................................... C/61

LOAD LIMITING DEVICE – 3b6


GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................................................................................................................... C/67
DISPLAY................................................................................................................................................................................... C/68
MAIN WORK DATA................................................................................................................................................................. C/69
COMPLEMENTARY WORK DATA READINGS................................................................................................................. C/70
EQUIPMENT AND OPERATING MODE............................................................................................................................. C/71
-ENCODED DISPLAY OF ATTACHMENTS AND OPERATING MODES............................................................... C/72
ATTACHMENT AND OPERATING MODE SELECTION.................................................................................................. C/72
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS AND ALARM MESSAGES............................................................................................................. C/73
DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAYS...................................................................................................................................................... C/74
MIDAC ALARMS..................................................................................................................................................................... C/75
TRANSDUCERS ANGLE, EXTENSION AND PRESSURE ALARM.............................................................................. C/78
TRANSDUCER CONGRUENCY ALARM........................................................................................................................... C/78
Model E.T. HERCULES

CHAPTER D
MAINTENANCE AND REGISTRATION
MAINTENANCE PRESCRIPTIONS....................................................................................................................................... D/3
DECLARATION OF VIBRATORY EMISSIONS.........................................................................................................D/5
DECLARATION OF FIRST INSPECTION BY MANUFACTURER............................................................................D/5
IDENTIFYING THE VEHICLE PARTS .....................................................................................................................D/6
MAINTENANCE AND REGISTRATION SCHEDULE................................................................................................D/8
Capacity of parts to lubricate.................................................................................................................D/12
COMPARATIVE OIL TABLE....................................................................................................................................D/12
OPENING THE ENGINE BONNET.........................................................................................................................D/14
PEDALS..................................................................................................................................................................D/16
PARKING BRAKE...................................................................................................................................................D/17
FUEL TANK.............................................................................................................................................................D/21
engine radiator and services....................................................................................................................D/22
Air filter.............................................................................................................................................................D/24
CYLINDER BLOCK VALVES...................................................................................................................................D/26
REDUCERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AXLES.............................................................................................................D/28
boom sliding blocks......................................................................................................................................D/35
Oilers ..................................................................................................................................................................D/36
battery isolator switch..............................................................................................................................D/40
fuses....................................................................................................................................................................D/41
Lighting................................................................................................................................................................D/42
PRELOAD AND TORQUE TABLE FOR CLASS 1 NUTS AND BOLTS..................................................................D/44
PRELOAD AND TORQUE COUPLE TABLE FOR CLASS 2 NUTS AND BOLTS...................................................D/45
TORQUE TABLE OF HYDRAULIC FITTINGS........................................................................................................D/46
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................................................D/47
SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS AND REGISTRATION METHOD............................................................................D/50
GENERAL MACHINE INFORMATION....................................................................................................................D/51
RECORDING PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE WORK COMPLETED........................................D/53

CHAPter E
electrical diagrams and circuits

CHAPter F
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

CHAPter G
TECHNICAL SHEETS

CHAPter H
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Dear customer,

Congratulations and thank you for choosing a machine.

This handbook has been written so that you can fully appreciate all the qualities of this machine.

We recommend reading this handbook in its entirety before using the machine for the first time.

It contains information, advice and important warnings for its use, which will help you to take full advantage of the
machine .

You will learn about its specifications and special features, as well as find essential information regarding maintenance
and care to ensure safe use and an extended lifetime of your machine .

We are certain that this handbook will prove to be an invaluable tool as you get to know your machine. We remain at
your disposal should you have any questions or problems.

Best regards,

The Sales Management


Model E.T. HERCULES

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FOR EDITING PURPOSES


INTRODUCTION
GUARANTEE
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION

A/1
Model E.T. HERCULES Introduction - Guarantee
Machine Identification

BEFORE STARTING THE MACHINE FOR THE FIRST TIME, THE OPERA-
TOR MUST CAREFULLY READ THIS MANUAL TO ENSURE HE OR SHE
FULLY UNDERSTANDS HOW THE TELEHANDLER WORKS AND TO
ENSURE HE OR SHE IS ADEQUATELY PREPARED TO USE IT.

ANY USE OTHER THAN THOSE DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL IS


STRICTLY FORBIDDEN AND DIECI SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGE TO PEOPLE, OBJECTS OR ANIMALS.

WHILE USING THE MACHINE, STRICTLY OBSERVE THE RESPECTIVE


DIAGRAMS OF THE ASSEMBLED ATTACHMENT.

A/2
INTRODUCTION

The aim of this manual is to provide the operator with instructions


for efficient and safe use and maintenance of the telehandler.

Following these instructions carefully will allow you to obtain


full efficiency and a long working life from your machine, and
will help to make your work considerably easier.

Furthermore, this Use and Maintenance manual is supplied


to you directly by the Dealer upon delivery of the machi- LEFT SIDE
ne, to ensure you understand all the instructions correctly.
However, should you have trouble understanding any part
of this manual, do not hesitate to contact your nearest De-
aler for clarification, as it is of utmost importance that the
operation and maintenance guidelines are fully understood
and carefully observed. Routine maintenance should be car-
ried out regularly. Keep a record of machine working hours.

When spare parts are required, always use original spare


parts. These can be supplied by your local Dealer who can
also provide advice and instructions for their installation and
use. The use of non-original spare parts may cause damage
to other parts of the machine; we therefore advise our cu-
stomers to purchase any spare parts required only from an
authorised Agent or Dealer.

Should the machine be destined for use in particularly se- RIGHT SIDE
vere conditions (for example in very dusty environments or e

sites, or on very clayey or muddy terrain), we advise consul-


ting your nearest dealer for specific instructions. Failure to
observe these instructions may void the machine guarantee.

This manual has been published for worldwide distribution


and the availability of certain equipment referred to from
time to time as being essential or available on request may
vary according to where the machine is being used. You can
obtain all necessary details about the equipment available in
your area from your nearest Distributor or Dealer.

Due to manufacturing demands, machines from the


standard production range may differ slightly from tho-
se mentioned in this manual. The company reserves the
right to make modifications without notice. FRONT VIEW

Because we continually introduce technical improve-


ments and bearing in mind updating and publication
times, the data in this manual may be changed at any
time and therefore should not be considered binding.

In some of the illustrations, panels or guards have been


removed in order to provide a clearer view. Never use
the machine without these panels or guards.

The left and right sides of the machine as referred to in


this manual are to be considered looking at the truck
from the back towards the front, or from the position of
the operator in the driver's seat.

REAR VIEW

A/3
Model E.T. HERCULES Introduction - Guarantee
Machine Identification
WARRANTY

WARRANTY: WARRANTY:
TERM, STARTING DATE AND ACTIVATION VALIDITY

Warranty: term Warranty in countries with a customer service organisation


DIECI S.r.l. (hereinafter referred to as DIECI), guarantees its - The warranty covers the replacement or repair of faulty
products for 12 months from delivery date to the end customer, parts that have been proven defective in terms of mate-
rial, manufacture and/or assembly.
Warranty: starting date - DIECI reserves the right to judge whether to repair or to
replace defective parts.
The guarantee is valid from the date the machine is for-
- DIECI shall respond to claims using the means and me-
warded from the factory (sale to distributors or dealers).
thods it deems most appropriate.
When delivery is handled by the distributor or dealer, DIECI
reserves the right to verify that the warranty starting date DIECI shall be responsible for:
corresponds to the shipping or delivery date on the product - The materials used.
transport document and/or the invoice date and may ask to - Labour.
see the original copies of these documents. - Travel and accommodation expenses.
The customer shall be responsible for:
Warranty: activation
- Packing and shipping costs for spare parts
The warranty is activated automatically from the date the machi- - Any other possible expenses not listed under those for
ne is forwarded from the factory (sale to distributors or dealers). which DIECI is liable.

Warranty in countries without a customer service organisation


- The warranty consists exclusively of the free supply
(ex works from the DIECI factory), of replacements for
parts which can no longer be used because proven to
be made of faulty material or due to faulty manufacture
and/or assembly.

Examination of replaced faulty parts


- Before acknowledging the warranty, DIECI may ask for
any faulty parts replaced during repairs to be returned
(DIECI shall cover shipping costs).

Additional warranty for repairs and replacement parts


- Any repairs carried out whether covered by the warranty
or not, and any spare parts replaced during repairs, are
guaranteed for 3 months from the date of repair or in-
stallation if the original guarantee has expired.

Intervention campaigns for faulty products

- The replacement procedures of faulty parts will be agre-


ed between DIECI and its authorised distributors/dea-
lers/workshops.
These intervention campaigns can be followed directly
by DIECI suppliers, responsible for supplying the compo-
nents to be replaced (interventions authorised by DIECI).
The above interventions will be preceded by written
communication by DIECI to its purchasers.
Only DIECI can decide the interventions methods (re-
pair, replacement, modification).

A/4
WARRANTY: REASONS FOR NON-EFFECT, NON-ACKNOWLEDGE-
REQUEST FOR REPAIRS UNDER GUARANTEE MENT OR TERMINATION OF THE WARRANTY

Warranty: reporting a fault or a faulty part Warranty: non-acknowledgement


- The fault must be reported by the end user, dealer, distri- The warranty is not acknowledged:
butor, retailer or by an authorised repair shop and must
- If the fault is not reported in the prescribed way and wi-
be sent directly to the DIECI customer service, within 8
thin the established expiry.
days of the occurrence of the malfunction.
- If there is a failure to return any faulty parts replaced du-
The report must include a clear description of the fault and
ring repairs to DIECI as requested.
exact machine specifications (type, model and serial number).
- If the machine is not immobilised; the warranty shall not
The specifications can be found on the machine in the posi-
be acknowledged for any damage caused by the failure
tions indicated in the USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
to comply with this requirement.

Compulsory machine immobilisation


Warranty: termination
- If there is a risk that the fault may jeopardise safety and ac-
cident prevention or may cause further damage, it is forbid- The guarantee is terminated:
den to use the machine until it has been repaired and tested. - If the purchaser does not fulfil payment obligations ac-
cording to contract.
- If any damage is caused by carelessness, negligence, or
Warranty: exclusion from the warranty by any use that does not comply with the specifications
in the use and maintenance manual (incorrect manoeu-
The following conditions and parts are not covered by the warranty:
vres, overloading, use of incorrect fuel, poor maintenan-
- Components subject to wear or deterioration due to pro- ce*, failure to use warning signals, etc.).
longed use: the clutch, belts, brake pads, sliding blocks, - If the malfunction is due to applications, attachments,
rollers, oils and fluids, filters, etc. modifications or repair work not authorised by DIECI or
- Electrical systems and components. carried out using faulty spare parts. (For this reason, we
- Damage caused by the weather, natural disasters, acts recommend always using original spare parts).
of vandalism, etc.
* For "recommended routine maintenance" refer to the USE
- Any other malfunction not due to an ascertained original
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
fault or for which DIECI cannot be held liable.
The following parts are also not covered by this warranty; they are
covered by the warranty provided by the relative manufacturers: Final terms
- Diesel engine - In case of non-effect, non-acknowledgement and termi-
- Axles and reduction gears nation of the warranty, the purchaser shall in no circum-
- Pumps and hydraulic engines stance be granted annulment of the contract, payment of
- Tyres. damages, or an extension of the warranty.
Application of the aforesaid warranties shall be managed by DIECI.
- DIECI does not make payments for charges of any type
which replacement machine or rental, labour and lost
profits, caused by machine stop. Save for different agre-
ements previously made in writing by both parties.

- Any warranty conditions other than those listed above


Any modification made to the machi- must be agreed in writing and signed by both parties.

ne requires a new test to verify confor- Spare parts supply


mity with directive 2006/42/“CE”;this
- DIECI guarantees the supply of original or alternative
procedure also applies in the case of re- spare parts for 10 years starting from the date the last
model of the range in question is produced.
pairs with non-original spare parts.

In case of any disputes, the Court of Reggio Emilia -

ITALY- shall be recognised as the competent authority.

A/5
Model E.T. HERCULES Introduction - Guarantee
Machine Identification

IDENTIFYING YOUR MACHINE

MACHINE MODELS

This vehicle has been designed and constructed for use as a self-propelled vehicle, including an operator's driving seat, with
tyres, intended for use on asphalt or natural surfaces and on rough ground. The vehicle consists of a main support structure
aimed at supporting the extendible arm. Forks or other attachments approved by DIECI can be mounted on the boom head. In
used normally, the vehicle lifts and places down loads through the extension/withdrawal and raising/lowering of the boom.

The Manufacturer offers a range of similar machines with different technical specifications and performances.

When consulting any table or diagram in this manual or on the machine itself, always refer to the model code number for your machine.

Hercules TELEHANDLERS

LIABILITY

- The machines are manufactured in compliance with the EEC regulations in effect when the machine was made available for purchase.

- Failure to observe the use and safety regulations or using the machine in less than perfect working condition may cause
an accident punishable by law.

- The Manufacturer shall not be held liable for any damage to persons, things or animals caused by improper use of this
machine or by any unauthorised structural modification, application or transformation.

- The Manufacturer reserves the right to carry out any possible modifications to the machine for technical or commercial re-
asons without notice.

A/6
IDENTIFYING THE TELEHANDLER

The machine can be identified by the serial number punch


marked on the front of the chassis and inside the cab. In
addition to this, the engine has its own serial number punch
marked on its block.
To ensure prompt and efficient service when ordering spare
parts or when requesting information or technical explana-
tions, always give the engine and chassis serial number.

Chassis serial number.............................................................

Engine serial number..............................................................

Cab serial number...................................................................


Chassis type and serial number.

Type of machine......................................................................

Owner/ Operator......................................................................

Dealer or agent's address.......................................................

................................................................................................

Delivery date...........................................................................

Guarantee expiry date.............................................................

NOTE:
The telehandlers commercially known as
Hercules
are stamped with a type-approval code Engine serial number
(see the first four numbers stamped on the chassis)

Axle serial number Specifications

A/7
Model E.T. HERCULES Introduction - Guarantee
Machine Identification

A/8
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Below is the FAC-SIMILE of the declaration of conformity:

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

(Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex II, part A)

Manufacture : DIECI SRL


Address : Via E. Majorana, 2-4- 42027 Montecchio Emilia (RE), Italy

Name and address of the person authorised to compile the technical file: MR. ENNIO MANGHI, DIECI SRL- Via E.
Majorana, 2-4 - 42027 Montecchio Emilia (RE), Italy

Declares that:

The L** xxx-type Telescopic Lift (xxxxxxxxx) Serial Number ***xxx****

L E
complies with all relevant dispositions of the following European Directives:

I
- Machinery Directive - 2006/42/EC

I M
- Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive – 2004/108/EC
- Directive on the environmental noise emission of machines – 2000/14/EC

- S
Assessment of conformity Ist referred to in Annex VI, carried out by the following Notified Body:

C
nº 1232, REGGIOEMILIA INNOVAZIONE S.c.a.r.l. – Via Sicilia, 31 – 42122 Regio Emilia

FA
Net power installed (kW): 74 kW
Measured sound power level: LWAm = 101 dB (A)
Guaranteed sound power level: LWam = 103 dB (A)

and, among others, the following harmonised European Standards:


UNI EN ISO 12100:2010
Safety of the machinery, General design principles, Risk evaluation and reduction
UNI EN 982:2009
Safety of the machinery - Safety requisites regarding systems and their components for hydraulic and pneumatic transmissions - Hydraulics
CEI EN 60204-1:2006
Safety of the machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.
UNI EN 1459:2010
Safety of the industrial trolleys - Telescopic arm self-propelling trolleys
UNI EN ISO 3471:2008 (ROPS)
Ground moving machines - Protective structures against tilting - Laboratory tests and performance requisites
UNI EN ISO 3449:2009 (FOPS II Level)
Ground moving machines - Protective structures against the falling of objects - Laboratory tests and performance requisites
UNI EN ISO 13309:2010
Construction machines - Electromagnetic compatibility of machines with internal electric power supply
EN15000

The machine is equipped with the following accessories:


BUD10** - Pair of forks

A plate bearing the CE marking is applied to the machine.

Montecchio Emilia, **/**/xxxx DIECI SRL


Via E. Majorana, 2-4
Montecchio Emilia (RE)
An Administrator
Ennio Manghi

A/9
Model E.T. HERCULES Introduction - Guarantee
Machine Identification

A/10
SAFETY REGULATIONS

B/1
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

ACKNOWLEDGING SAFETY REGULATIONS

This is the “POTENTIAL HAZARD WARNING" SYMBOL.

Wherever this symbol " " appears, on the vehicle or in this manual, you must take care against potential damage or injury to the
vehicle, other equipment, or people. Follow all recommended precautions and observe regulations for safe use and maintenance.

UNDERSTANDING WARNING NOTICES

In this manual certain terms are used to indicate different level of risk, including:

- DANGER -
Indicates a situation of potential danger for the vehicle’s operator or
other people directly involved in its operation.

- ATTENTION -
Indicates a situation of imminent danger which, if not averted, may cause damage to the vehicle
and to the safety of the operator or others directly involved.

- WARNING -
Indicates a situation of imminent danger which, if not averted, may cause damage to the vehicle.

- PROHIBITION -
Indicates strictly prohibited actions or things that are dangerous to personnel

The above-mentioned words are always accompanied by the corresponding potential hazard warning symbol.

- NOTE -
Indicates an additional explanation for a given piece of information.

Carefully read the safety regulations given and follow all recommended precautions in order to avoid potential risks
and safeguard your health and safety.
The "potential hazard” symbol and the "warning notices" have been included to highlight situations that DIECI feels are of parti-
cular importance.
However, the manual must be read and learned in full and must be kept inside the vehicle, in a covered and protected place.
If in doubt, contact the nearest agent or dealer.

B/2
GENERAL WARNINGS
Use of the vehicle for purposes different than those de- Everything possible has been done during the design and
scribed in this manual is strictly forbidden. All functions construction phases of this vehicle to make your job as safe
and procedures concerning the operation and mounting as possible. Due caution, however, is indispensable and there
of the vehicle's attachments that are not described in is no better rule to prevent accidents.
this manual are strictly forbidden.
DIECI is not liable for damage resulting from operations per-
If the vehicle is used for purposes different than those formed instinctively, as a reflex, while in a state panic, or in
for which it was designed, DIECI cannot be held respon- the event of malfunctioning, accidents, etc. during use of the
sible for damage to things, the vehicle itself, or for inju- vehicle.
ry to persons caused by such improper use.
DIECI is not liable for behaviour foreseeable on the part of
The User’s Manual and the parts catalogue are an integral certain categories of people, including: apprentices, adole-
part of the vehicle and must remain with it even when it is scents, disabled persons, personnel in training.
sold to a new owner. The manual, in the user’s language,
must be carefully stored aboard the vehicle at all times for DIECI vehicles cannot be used for betting, competitions
quick reference. If the manual becomes creased, damaged or or personal use.
can no longer be easily read, it must be replaced immediately.
Read all of the safety stickers on the vehicle and observe
The instructions for use, maintenance and repair in this all regulations printed on these stickers before starting up,
handbook must be followed if the vehicle is to be considered running or refuelling the vehicle or before carrying out main-
as being operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s tenance work.
intended uses. Clean the stickers if they are covered by dirt, cement or other
deposits. Do not remove these stickers for any reason. Prompt-
This vehicle must be used, assisted or repaired only by ly replace any stickers which may be damaged, lost or illegible.
adequately informed, trained and educated personnel
on the use of the mean and on the safety regulations to To guarantee your safety and that of others, do not modify the
be observed. structure or adjust the various vehicle components (Hydraulic
pressure, calibration of load limiters, engine rotation, assem-
The persons authorised to use and maintain the vehicle are: bly of additional attachments, etc.).
The same holds true for the deactivation or modification of
USE OPERATOR: person trained and educated through ap- safety systems. In such cases, the manufacturer shall be ab-
propriate theoretical-practical course specific for using such solved from all liability.
equipment;
Periodic inspections must be carried out in order to maintain
GENERAL SERVICE TECHNICIAN: person trained and the vehicle's "compliance status", as reported in the dedicated
educated to carry out routine maintenance interventions with area of this Use and maintenance manual.
basic mechanical, electrical and hydraulic knowledge;
Take all necessary safety precautions to prevent poten-
SPECIALISED SERVICE TECHNICIAN: person trained and tial risks when carrying out operations or procedures
educated to carry out routine and extraordinary maintenance that are not explicitly recommended or allowed for in this
interventions with in-depth and specific mechanical, electri- manual.
cal and hydraulic knowledge, usually appointed or authori-
sed by DIECI or dealer. Do not carry out or engage in operations or actions ex-
pressly prohibited in this manual.
All procedures and maintenance operations not descri-
bed in this manual are strictly forbidden. If in doubt, contact the nearest agent or dealer.
All the repairs and maintenance work must be perfor-
med in authorised repair centres.

The user must always observe the general safety regula-


tions as well as those for accident prevention, such as traffic
rules if the vehicle is used on public roads.

Any arbitrary modification made to the vehicle will


absolve DIECI from all liability FOR DAMAGE or injury
resulting from such modification.

DIECI is not liable for damage caused by negligent use of


this vehicle even if said damage is not a result of intentional
improper use of the vehicle.

B/3
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

PROTECTIVE CLOTHING INSPECTING THE VEHICLE


- Always wear clothing appropriate for the work that must
be carried out. Do not wear loose clothing, ties, chains,
belts or other accessories that may become caught in
the control lever or in other parts of the vehicle.
- Do not wear jewellery or any other metal accessories as
they could cause injury if caught in the vehicle or if an
electric current passes through the body.
- Operators with long hair must tie it back and be careful
to not to catch it in the vehicle.
- Depending on the type of work or construction site, ope- - ATTENTION -
rators must choose and wear clothing appropriate for
Inspect your vehicle every day or at the start of every
protecting them from injury.
shift, examining it carefully before beginning work.
- DANGER - - Make sure that the tyres are suitable to the type of
Before operating the vehicle, it is the operator's respon- ground present.
sibility, to ask the construction site manager about the There are different types of tyres for sand, road, agricultural
possible risks of the work and the accident prevention land, snow, etc. For additional information, contact your nea-
clothing that must be worn. rest agent or dealer.

- ATTENTION - - ATTENTION -
The following must always be available to the operator: Users who detect any faults with their vehicle (noise,
vibrations, unusual odours, instrument errors, smoke,
• Protective helmet
• Accident-prevention shoes oil leaks, etc.) or establish that the vehicle does not
• Protective goggles or protective face mask respond to safety regulations must suspend use of the
• Protective gloves vehicle and immediately inform their safety manager.
• Protective headwear against noise (ear protectors) - Operators are PROHIBITED from carrying out repair or
• Reflective clothing adjustment work unless they have been trained to do so.
• Waterproof clothing
Only the person charged to do so should carry out main-
• Breathing apparatus or filtering mask
tenance work on the vehicle.

- ATTENTION -
Before beginning operation, ensure the vehicle is in
good working order for maximum efficiency in
compliance with all safety regulations.
- Consult the maintenance chapter of this manual to carry
out the checks listed below.
- Carry out the following checks to verify the proper wor-
king order of the functions listed below:

- Different Individual Protection Devices are used by the Efficiency of parking brakes.
operators depending on the type of site and risks pre- Engine oil level (check and top up if necessary).
sent in the work place. Always use the most suitable IPD Hydraulic oil level (check and top up if necessary)
to the type of work being carried out. Air filter clogging indicator (check and clean if necessary)
Tyre condition and pressure (check).
- Accident prevention clothing is to be considered perso- Fuel level (check).
nal gear: Do not wear the accident prevention clothing of Signalling and warning devices (check).
other people. Steering efficiency.
- Accident prevention equipment must always be whole and Service brake efficiency.
in good condition. Damaged clothing cannot ensure ade- Ensure that all nuts and bolts are tight.
quate protection. Do not wear damaged clothing: always re- Lighting
place damaged or torn clothing before operating the vehicle. Direction indicators
- Always protect yourself against noise as prolonged exposu- Emergency lights.
re to loud noise can damage your hearing or may cause he- Switches.
aring loss. Always wear anti-noise headphones or earplugs Indicator lights.
to protect yourself from excessive and irritating noises. Windscreen wipers.
Reverse motion alarm.
- Headphones for listening to the radio or music should
not be worn while using the vehicle. The operator must If the vehicle is not used for six months, it should be checked tho-
always be fully alert while operating the vehicle. roughly before use. The operations are detailed at pages B/22.

B/4
Ensuring the vehicle is clean PREPARATION FOR EMERGENCIES
Clean the windows, lights and rear-view mirrors. - Always be prepared in the event of a fire or an accident.
Remove all mud and dirt deposits.
Clear away any rubbish and dirt from inside the cab, par-
ticularly from the pedals and controls.
Clean the engine, articulated joints and radiator.
Remove any excess grease.
Make sure the cab steps and the handle are clean and dry.
Clean all safety stickers and manoeuvring instructions.
Replace any stickers that are illegible or missing.

Checking for damage

Make sure there are no damaged or missing parts - ATTENTION -


Make sure all articulated pins are properly fastened. Keep a fire extinguisher and first aid kit and (not sup-
Make sure there are no signs of possible cracks or flaws plied by the manufacturer) close at hand at all times.
or other damage to the windows.
Make sure there are no oil, fuel or cooling liquid leaks - Carry out periodic inspections to ensure that the first aid
underneath the vehicle. kit contains all necessary items; replenish contents if ne-
Make sure the wheel bolts are properly tightened. cessary.
Check all safety devices.
Ensure that the ROPS/FOPS structure is not damaged. - To properly use the extinguisher, carefully read the in-
Make sure that the seat belt and relevant attachments structions located on the extinguisher.
are not damaged or extremely worn.
- Carry out periodic inspections and maintenance (six-
- ATTENTION - monthly) to ensure that the extinguisher is ready for use
at any given moment.
Whenever abnormalities are detected, repair them as
soon as possible, contacting an Authorised Service - Create a table of priorities with the manager responsible
Centre of the Manufacturer. for safety in order to best deal with potential fires or ac-
cidents.
- PROHIBITION -
- Keep emergency telephone numbers (doctors, ambulan-
IF THE VEHICLE IS NOT IN PERFECT WORKING ORDER
ce, hospital and fire brigade) clearly visible and near the
ITS OPERATION IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
telephone.

- Personnel adequately trained and educated for mana-


Adjustments
ging emergencies through appropriate theoretical-practi-
cal course must be present on site/in the work place.
- Adjust the seat and steering wheel so that the operator
can comfortably reach all the driving controls.
- Adjust the rear view mirror/s so that when sitting in the
driver’s cab, the rear of the vehicle can be clearly seen

B/5
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

FIRST AID Haemorrhage

Below are a few standard procedures for First aid that can It is necessary to directly press on the injured part with
be activated in case of accident occurred following use of sterile gauze pad, lift the limb and eventually compress the
the vehicle or of the individual equipment and accessories injured part upstream, using tourniquet.
that are used.
Can be useful for the operators during emergency situations Treating superficial wounds:
during vehicle use in the various life phases of the same expose and accurately clean the wound by washing it, disin-
(transport, installation, use, maintenance, adjustment, etc.) fect it with physiological solution, cover it with sterile gauze;
or that rush to help the other operators near-by. proceeding with bandaging the wounded area, avoiding
tightening the bandage excessively to enable good blood flow.

First-Aider Tasks Treating deep wounds:


it is a priority to protect one self against the risk of contami-
- activate first aid (emergency call); nation using gloves and face mask; staunch the bleeding
- check the victim and, if necessary, support its vital functions; until it stops, or until the ambulance arrives, by directly pres-
- stop external bleeding; sing or using other pressure points; call 118 informing them
- protect wounds and burns; you are staunching an arterial bleeding.
- protect the victim from further injuries; Only after bleeding is under control, treat the wound.
- do not perform useless or damaging actions, which ad-
ministering drinks, moving the victim, reducing disloca- - ATTENTION -
tions and/or fractures, etc. When disinfecting the wound DO NOT use cotton wool,
denaturated alcohol, antibiotic powder.
Emergency call

The good result of an emergency intervention also depends


on how quickly 118 (Italian emergency medical support) ma-
nages to reach the place of the event.
This is why the first-aider in charge of calling the emergency
must precisely indicate;
- the address of where the accident or illness took place;
- the number of injured or ill parties;
- the possible cause of the event;
- the state of the vital functions of the injured party, speci-
fying whether the same is conscious or not and if brea-
thing normally or not.

It is always opportune to also give:


- own details, a telephone number where to be contacted;
- await the aiders in an easily visible place.

Traumas

Distortion, dislocations and fractures treatment:


it is necessary to block the articulation in the position it is in
after the trauma, using bandages or other, supporting the
analgesic position of the injured party, without attempting dan-
gerous manoeuvres. Apply ice (with ice bag or other means).

Contusions, crushing:
in case of contusions and/or crushing to upper and lower
limbs (fingers, hand, feet, etc.) immediately place the limb
under cold running water and place ice on it, also checking
for wounds and/or cuts. If so, disinfect the affected area.

B/6
DRIVER’S CAB
- Use available footsteps and handles to reach the dri-
ver's seat

- ATTENTION -
Only use the vehicle if the seat is correctly adjusted. A po-
orly adjusted seat can cause the driver to tire quickly and,
- Always face the vehicle when getting in or out of it,
thus, may lead to incorrect operation. It may also alter
maintain contact with the vehicle in three points at all
perception of external objects from the driver’s seat and
times, using the handles and steps provided.
can compromise the proper execution of manoeuvres.
- Never use controls for purposes different than those for
- The seat should be adjusted according to the height and
which they were created for (Ex.: Getting on or off the
weight of the driver.
vehicle, hanging clothing, etc.)
- The driver should be able to fully press down the pedals
- Never jump down from the vehicle.
and operate all control levers while resting his/her back
- Never get on or off a moving vehicle. fully up against the seat back.
- Never jump on or off the vehicle.
- If the vehicle begins to move without an operator inside
the cab, do not jump on the vehicle to try to stop it.
- Never get on or off the vehicle while holding equipment.
- Always keep footboards, steps and handles clean and
make sure they are not slippery.
- Do not put any suction cups on the windows. Suction
cups act as lenses and can cause fires.
- Do not use cell phones in the operator's cab during vehi-
- DANGER -
cle operation. Always fasten seat belts correctly
- Never bring dangerous items such as inflammable or before beginning operation.
explosive objects, in the driving cab. - The seat belt has been fastened properly when it is sits
snugly around the body.

- DANGER -
The vehicle is equipped with a cab that is able to support
the weight of the vehicle itself should it tip over (ROPS). It
is therefore, essential that the driver remains firmly faste-
ned in the seat thanks to the seat-belt to prevent him/her
from falling out of the cabin and possibly getting crushed.
- When working in areas where there is a risk of falling, - Before starting up the vehicle, carefully check the belt,
bouncing or interference from objects capable of hitting the buckle and the fasteners of the structure. If any part
the operator or entering the cab, mount suitable safety shows sign of damage or wear and tear, replace the seat
panels to protect the operator. Always close windows. belt or component part before using the vehicle.
Always ensure that bystanders are at a safe distance
- Remain seated with seat belt properly fastened whene-
and cannot be hit by bouncing or falling objects.
ver using the vehicle in order to reduce the risk of injury
- If the cab window on the telescopic boom side should in case of an accident.
beak, risk of contact between the operator and the boom
- Following an accident, check the safety belts and the
exists. Immediately stop operation and replace glass.
attachment points to frame are intact. If damaged, im-
- PROHIBITION - mediately replace.

IT IS FORBIDDEN to operate the vehicle with arms, - DANGER -


legs or any body part out of the driver's seat.
Do not carry passengers on your vehicle.

- DANGER -
The operator must always maintain
a normal driving position.

B/7
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

DRIVING AUTHORISATIONS Hook Accessory:


Course for personnel on using the crane, including lifting
equipment and accessories
- ATTENTION -
Follow the laws relevant to the country where Program:
the vehicle is being used. - Standard of reference regarding safety at work and cra-
ne specification
- verification crane conformity and minimum requisites
- ATTENTION - - specific risks for the operators and risks deriving from
the presence of suspended loads
Only qualified and properly trained
- checks and verifications
personnel can use the vehicle.
- routine and extraordinary maintenance
- IPD and safety signals
Depending on type of accessory used (Shovel, Forks,
- practical test
Basket, Hook), the operator must attend appropriate
theoretical-practical course where, at least, the fol-
lowing subjects are dealt with:
- ATTENTION -
Shovel Accessory: Use of the vehicle is subject to driving authorisation/
Course for driving machines and earth handling personnel enabling issued by the facility/construction site mana-
Program: ger where the vehicle is to be used.
- main risks linked to using the driving machine
- structural and operational features, technical and control - Users must always keep his/her driving authorisation on
components, safety devices, technical documentation hand during vehicle use.
- checks and verifications - Operators cannot authorise other people to drive the vehicle.
- pre-arrangement for eventual circulation/transport on
road and specific behavioural Standards
- safe techniques for excavation, materials and earth han-
dling, small demolitions
- Accessories, tooling operations
- IPD and safety signals
- practical test

Forks Accessory:
Course for personnel using the vehicles for handling and
transporting materials
Program:
- main risks linked to using the vehicle with the specific
accessory
- structural and operational features, technical and control
components, safety devices, technical documentation
- checks and verifications
- pre-arrangement for eventual circulation/transport on
road and specific behavioural Standards
- safe techniques for materials handling, loading and unlo-
ading
- safety arrangement and load stability
- accessories, tooling operations
- IPD and safety signals
- practical test

Basket Accessory:
Course for personnel using the elevation mobile work pla-
tforms (PLE)
Program:
- Standard of reference
- safe operating and use of the platform
- emergency descent procedures
- periodical checks and verifications
- routine and extraordinary maintenance
- IPD III cat. and safety signals
- practical test

B/8
STARTING UP THE VEHICLE
- Regardless of their level of driving experience, operators
must familiarise themselves with the position and fun-
ction of all controls and instruments before operating the
machine.
- Do not use the vehicle when hands or shoes are wet or
dirty with grease or greasy substances.
- Inspect control instruments immediately after start up,
- DANGER - while the engine is hot and at regular intervals during
Before starting the engine, make sure all control levers use, in order to promptly recognise and resolve any mal-
are in a neutral position, the parking brake is engaged, functions.
the engine bonnet is closed and that there is nobody in
the area surrounding the vehicle.

- DANGER -
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The vehicle can be started up or manoeuvred only when Despite the vehicle being used in the most different situa-
the operator is seated in the driver's seat, with the seat tions, it is necessary to observe, in advance, the compliance
belt fastened and properly adjusted. with the minimal operational Standards, as reported below:

- DANGER -
Parameter Admitted values
Before using the vehicle verify all
safety devices are functional. Working temperature from -5°C to +40°C
Average daily temperature <40°C
The operator must always maintain control of the vehicle. Storage temperature from -15°C to +50°C
Humidity from 20 to 95%
- Use the acoustic warning device or other signals to alert Altitude <2500m
people in the area before starting up the vehicle.
- The vehicle may move suddenly if started up without
following the correct procedure, thus, creating the risk of
damage personal injury.

- Do not start the engine or touch the levers if there is a


danger sticker posted inside the cab.

- Never start the engine by causing short circuiting betwe-


en the terminals on the starter.

- Be careful when using auxiliary batteries as the gas con-


tained in these may explode, causing serious damage.

- To start the engine using auxiliary batteries, follow the in-


structions provided in the paragraph "START UP USING
AUXILIARY BATTERIES". Incorrect procedure may cau-
se serious damage to the electrical/electronic system,
the vehicle to move suddenly, the battery to burst, and
damage to objects and/or people.

B/9
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

SAFE OPERATION

- DANGER -
DO NOT USE THE VEHICLE IF YOU ARE UNDER THE
EFFECT OF ALCOHOL, DRUGS OR IF YOU HAVE TA-
KEN MEDICINES THAT MAY MAKE YOU DROWSY OR
MAY ALTER YOUR REFLEX AND REACTION TIME.

- DANGER -
DO NOT CARRY PASSENGERS ON THE VEHICLE OR
IN THE DRIVER'S CAB OR ON ANY OTHER PART OF - When working in a congested area, always use the re-
THE TELEHANDLER OR ON ANY OTHER MOUNTED quired signals; during operations that require the use of
ATTACHMENTS EXCEPT ON THE PASSENGER CON- more than vehicle, use signals known by all personnel.
VEYING BASKET. Designate one person to signal and coordinate the work
zone. Make sure that everyone follows the directions gi-
ven by the person in charge of signalling.
- DANGER -
CHECK THE CORRECT POSITION OF THE - When working conditions require an operator on the
REAR VIEW MIRRORS. ground, he/she must use hand signals in compliance
with local regulations in the country of use of the vehicle.

- ATTENTION - - When working alongside excavations or on the edge of


the road or soft ground: keep at a safe distance as they
THE PERCEPTION OF OBJECTS' POSITIONS THROU- vehicle may overturn. Designate a person on the ground
GH THE REAR VIEW MIRRORS MAY NOT BE EXACTLY to be in charge of signalling.
AS THEY ARE; THEY MAY SEEM FURTHER AWAY OR Remember that after strong rains, the use of explosives
NEARER THAN THEY ARE IN REALITY. DESPITE THE or an earthquake, the ground is more fragile.
USE OF REAR VIEW MIRRORS, BLIND SPOTS MAY BE
PRESENT AND THE OPERATOR MAY NOT ABLE TO
- Operation on steep sloping roads can cause overtur-
SEE CERTAIN POINTS WELL. ALWAYS WORK WITH
ning or sliding. Take proper precautions.
MAXIMUM CARE.
- Always move in a straight line to go up or down a
- While the vehicle is running, always keep light signals
slope. Moving crosswise or along the slope is extre-
on. These serve to warn people that the vehicle is about
mely dangerous.
to move.
- Inspect the work zone before beginning operation. - Drive slowly on grass, leaves or wet steel slabs. Even
- Inspect the ground and the conditions of the land at the when operating on slight inclines the vehicle may slip,
work site; ensure safe conditions before operating the lose balance or overturn.
vehicle. Do not use in places at risk for landslides or
rock falling. - When working on the upper part or inside buildings or
- Take due precautions to prevent that any unauthorised other structures, ensure stability before beginning opera-
persons from entering the working area. tions. The risk of collapse exists and can cause serious
injuries or damage.
- When moving through or operating in shallow water or soft
ground, verify the shape and the conditions of the land,
- Do not use the vehicle’s force of impact to carry out
the depth and speed of water flow beginning operation.
tasks. These vehicles have not been designed for said
- Do not drive with foot on the brake pedal or with the par- use, therefore, such use may cause vehicle overturning,
king brake engaged. damage, the breakage of components and attach-
- Continually evaluate the stopping distance required. ments, in addition to serious personal injury.
- Do not drive at high speeds.
- Always look in the forward direction and maintain good
road visibility. Frequently use the side view mirrors and
check their conditions, cleanliness and position regularly.
- Keep windows, mirrors and lights clean and in good con-
dition.
- Verify that bonnets and the door are closed before be-
ginning operation.

B/10
- Driving on side sloping roads may cause overturning or
sliding. Take proper precautions.
- Do not leave the vehicle loaded on a slope exceeding
15%, even when the parking brake is engaged.
- Make sure the vehicle is level before lifting the boom - Make sure there is no one in the vehicle’s trajectory or in
when operating on sloping ground. work zone.
- When moving on longitudinal slopes: - Designate someone on the ground to supervise ma-
Drive and brake delicately. noeuvres if the operator's field of vision is obstructed.
When moving without loads turn forks or attach Always maintain visual contact with the person on the
ments downstream. ground.
When moving with loads turn forks or attachments
upstream. - ATTENTION -
Do not attempt to carry out operations which exceed
- ATTENTION - vehicle’s capability.
Snow can hide obstacles and objects, and cover holes
dug-out areas and ditches. Proceed with caution when - ATTENTION -
working in snowy conditions. Operation of the vehicle
Do not lift loads exceeding the capacity of the vehicle or
if the quantity of snow does not allow for clear distin-
accessories and do not increase the size any counter-
ction of obstacles and possible dangers along the path
balance regardless of the artifice utilised.
IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
- Avoid obstacles.
- Take care when clearing snow and do not venture off the
main road; that which is hidden at the sides of the road - When lifting a load, ensure that nothing and no one
may cause vehicle overturning or damage to various hampers the movement and avoid false manoeuvres.
components. - Never leave the motor running when no operator is present.
- Surfaces covered by snow or ice are extremely dange- - Never leave the key in the vehicle when it is unattended.
rous. Operate with caution, reducing vehicle speed as
much as possible and engaging levers slowly.
- ATTENTION -
- Operate with caution. If the vehicle should sink into the
snow, it may overturn or remain buried. Do not venture Never leave the vehicle in the parked position
from the road and avoid remaining entrapped or buried with a load raised.
under heaps of snow.
- Dust, rain, fog etc. may reduce visibility. If visibility is
- Extra care should be taken, when working on icy terrain. limited, reduce speed and use appropriate lighting.
Should the temperature rise, the ice could melt and the
ground could become slippery.
- Use caution in the presence of electrical cables, ditches,
or freshly excavated or worked ground.
- Make sure not to cause risk to others in the area when
backing up the vehicle.
- Always check the space around the vehicle before car-
rying out any manoeuvres.

B/11
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

- The vehicles are equipped with a special lighting system


for transfers. If working at night or in a tunnel, adequate
external lighting must be used.
- Do not lift, move or rotate the attachment above any per-
son. If loads fall or bangs occur, damage may result.
- Do not authorise people to come near to or pass under-
neath a load.
- During operation in certain conditions, particles of mate-
rial may be ejected. In such conditions, it is a good idea
to wear protective goggles and clear the area of those
people not in possession of such goggles.
- Pay careful attention to crumbling walls, landslides, fal-
ling material or objects that may break the cab window
and hit the driver.
- Never operate the vehicle under an overhang as this - ATTENTION -
could give way and fall onto the vehicle.
If operating close to overhead electrical lines, check that
- Do not excessively weigh down the vehicle or transport
the safety distance between the vehicle and the electrical
loads that may fall out or overturn.
line is sufficient, in compliance with current Standard.
- Do not operate near flammable material.
Consult your local electric company.
In any case, never work at Operating or parking the ve-
- ATTENTION - hicle too close to cables; less than 5 m from the lines.
When manoeuvring the vehicle, pay attention to bulky Damp ground may increase the risk of electrocution.
parts above the vehicle. There are parts that j
ut out from the cab. - ATTENTION -
- The vehicle is equipped with a protective cab against fal- electrical leads to increased risk of being struck by
ling objecting (FOPS). Use of a safety helmet is required lightning or being seriously injured.
if there is a risk of falling objects.
- Do not use the vehicle at night, in dark or scarcely lit - Designate someone on the ground to signal when the
conditions unless the vehicle is equipped with working vehicle is too close to power lines.
lights (optional). for additional information, contact your
local dealer. - Do not allow anyone near the vehicle when operating in
the vicinity of power lines. Wear rubber shoes and glo-
ves as a precaution against possible emergencies. Co-
- ATTENTION - ver the seat with a rubber piece of fabric and take care
Do not get onto the cargo load without having checked that: to not touch the chassis with any unprotected body parts.
- it is correctly positioned and anchored
- Should the vehicle collide with an electrical cable, the
- that the vehicle to which it is connected (van, truck operator, to avoid electrocution, must never abandon
etc.) is not able to move the driver's cab until he/she is certain that the electrical
- that the deck is able to support the total weight of power supply has been properly disconnected.
the vehicle and its load
- that the width of the deck is appropriate for that of
the vehicle.

- Pay particular attention to loading docks, to trenches,


scaffolding, to land that has been recently excavated or
filled.
- When driving on roads or slopes pay close attention to
the engine’s RPM. A high engine RPM may result in me-
chanical damage. Always maintain control of RPMs and
engine speed.

B/12
- To prevent damaging hydraulic connections when chan-
- ATTENTION -
ging an attachment, stop the engine and wait a minute
to remove pressure from the circuit. Always clean con- Before each use, check that attachments have been proper-
nectors before their reinsertion. ly mounted and secured on their corresponding supports.
- Check the cleanliness, protection and the conditions of
rapid detachment connections in attachment circuits daily. - ATTENTION -
Prior to each use, check that the cab safety system has
- ATTENTION - been set in compliance with the mounted attachment.
Operators who note that the vehicle is not operating pro-
- Instructions supplied by the anti-tipping system must be
perly or that is does not conform to safety regulations
considered valid for vehicles in standard working condi-
must immediately inform the construction site manager.
tions, on flat, even ground and with properly functioning
and correctly calibrated instruments. Regardless, limit va-
- PROHIBITION - lues displayed on the load tables must never be exceeded.
IT IS FORBIDDEN for operators to directly carry out - Never bring equipment near open flames.
repair or adjustment work unless trained to do so. Only
the person charged to do so should carry out mainte-
nance work on the vehicle.

- PROHIBITION -
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN to attempt starting the vehi-
cle by pushing or pulling on it. This may cause serious
damage to people and/or the vehicle.

- If operating the vehicle at low temperatures (-10°C),


empty and refill the tank using lubricants, fuel or cooling
liquids suitable for such temperatures.

- ATTENTION -
The use of the vehicle in protected environments such
as refineries or explosive atmospheres is STRICTLY
PROHIBITED. Special optional equipment is available
for use in these types of locations. Contact your agent
or dealer.

- Ensure that service brakes and horn are working properly.


- Slow down before turning.
- Maintain control of the vehicle and its speed in all situations.
- Do not drive in reverse for long distances.
- Brake slowly, avoid abrupt braking.
- Hydraulic steering is very sensitive to steering wheel mo-
vements. Steer slowly and avoid any sudden movements.
- The speed of vehicles with loads must never exceed 10
Km/h. Should the load exceed 50% of the maximum admit-
ted load, the machine speed must be reduced to 5Km/h.

- PROHIBITION -
Carrying people on or lifting people up with the vehicle
is STRICTLY PROHIBITED unless the vehicle is equip-
ped for said purpose and has a special certificate of
conformity regarding the transport of people.

- Carefully follow loading programme instructions.

B/13
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

LOAD HANDLING - ATTENTION -


The standard illumination of the telescopic loader is not
- ATTENTION -
suitable in working conditions with poor visibility or for
Always adhere to safety regulations; always transport ba- use at night. There are several ways to improve visibi-
lanced, properly arranged loads to prevent overturning. lity in poor lighting conditions.
Contact your local DIECI dealer.
- Always fully insert forks under loads and bring them to
the transport position (forks at 300 mm from the ground - Lifting or transporting a load that exceeds the nominal
and slanted backwards, boom completely retracted). capacity or the vehicle or accessory is PROHIBITED.
- Never lift a load harnessed with a single fork or table.
- Always check that the pallets, boxes, etc. are in good - ATTENTION -
condition and suitable for the type of load to be lifted. BEFORE LIFTING LOADS, OPERATORS MUST BE FAMI-
- Manoeuvre the mean with the boom raised only in ex- LIAR WITH THE WEIGHT OF THE LOAD AND ITS CEN-
ceptional circumstances. In these circumstances, ope- TRE OF GRAVITY.
rate with due prudence, reduce speed as much as pos-
sible and brake delicately. Make sure that visibility is - Load tables are valid for centres of gravity that are 500
always sufficient. If necessary, ask an operator on the mm from the heels of the forks. Contact your dealer for in-
ground to guide operations. formation regarding centres of gravity at greater distances.

- During handling operations, reduce speed as much as - Pay CAREFUL ATTENTION during the transport of
possible and brake delicately. loads with a variable centre of gravity (e.g. liquids). Ope-
rate with caution in order to limit such variations and to
- Do not manoeuvre loads while the vehicle is moving. prevent the risk of vehicle overturning.
- Pay ATTENTION regarding the risk of limbs being cru-
- ATTENTION - shed during manual fork adjustment operations.
Load handling can be carried out only in reduced
gears “1” and "II" (first and second gear).

- Before turning, slow down as much as possible, and mo-


nitor the load.
- Handle loads with care, at low speed and without sud-
den or skipping movements, above all if carrying at great
heights.
- Do not change direction sharply or at a high speed.

- ATTENTION -
IN THE EVENT OF VEHICLE OVERTURNING, DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO EXIT FROM THE TELEHANDLER DURING
AN ACCIDENT. ALWAYS FASTEN SEAT-BELTS WHEN
DRIVING THE VEHICLE. ALWAYS KEEP SEAT-BELTS
FASTENED WHENEVER INSIDE THE CAB.

- Always use the parking brake when setting down or lif-


ting a load on a slope.
- Always ensure good visibility in the work area, including
direct vision and visibility using rear view mirrors in order
to check for the presence of people, animals, obstacles,
holes and changes in slope etc. animals, obstacles, ani-
mals, obstacles, holes, slope variations
- If visibility on the right side is limited during boom ope-
ration, before lifting the load, ensure that the work area
is clear and make note of the position of any possible
obstacles and irregularities in the terrain.
- Always ensure good visibility (clean windows, clean and
properly working headlights etc.)

B/14
PARKING THE VEHICLE
- Always park on flat, even and level ground where there
is no risk of falling masses, landslides or flooding.
- Lower outriggers to the ground (if present)
- Retract the boom completely and lower it to the ground.
- Engage the parking brake
- Move the “direction” lever to position "N".
- Run the engine for a minimum of 60 seconds before
switching off in order to cool the engine down.
- Turn the key to the halt engine position.
- Remove the key from the ignition.
- Block the hydraulic controls using the devices provided
(when present).
- Close and lock windows using the specially provided
handles.
- Close and lock the cab door.
- Place wedges under the wheels.
- Make sure that the vehicle is parked so that it does not
block traffic and at least 5 metres away from railway tracks.

TEMPORARY HALT

Gradually release the accelerator pedal.

Bring the vehicle to a halt on flat ground.

Engage the parking brake

Move the “direction” lever to position "N".

While the vehicle is being run-in (50 h) do not keep the


diesel engine at minimum revs for too long.

- ATTENTION -
IF THE OPERATOR MUST ABANDON THE DRIVER'S
SEAT, HE/SHE SHOULD FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS
PROVIDED IN THE PARAGRAPH REGARDING "PAR-
KING THE VEHICLE".

B/15
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

ROAD TRAVEL ROAD TRAVEL (INSTRUCTIONS)

- ATTENTION - - Use the levelling control switch to level the vehicle‘s


chassis in relation to the axes of the wheels (if present).
BEFORE THE VEHICLE IS TRANSFERRED TO THE
ROAD MAKE SURE YOU ARE ACTING IN COMPLIANCE - Ensure that all outriggers have been perfectly retracted
WITH THE RULES AND REGULATIONS PERTINENT IN and raised (if present).
THE COUNTRY OF USE. - Close the telescopic arm (boom) completely.
THE OBLIGATIONS FOR ROAD TRAVEL ARE GIVEN IN Lower the main boom completely and raise it slightly
THE VEHICLE REGISTRATION DOCUMENT. (300 mm from ground).
- Make sure the lights are functioning properly before
- Dimmed headlights should be used during day hours driving the vehicle on roads. Check that the ‘slow vehi-
and on roads where use of visual signals and lighting cle’ revolving indicator light is installed and operational.
devices is not mandatory. Keep it activated during both day and night use.
- Ensure correct operation and cleaning of headlights, di- - Carry out the wheel timing. Setting steering as shown in
rectional lights and windscreen wipers.
the vehicle handbook and to blocking the selection lever
using the relevant device IS COMPULSORY. In Italy set
- ATTENTION - the 4 wheel steering mode; on public roads do not use
ENSURE CORRECT POSITIONING OF crosswise steering or 2 wheel steering.
REAR VIEW MIRRORS. - Ensure that the fuel quantity is sufficient.
PAY ATTENTION AS THE PERCEPTION OF OBJECTS' - Mount all attachments provided for road driving in com-
POSITIONS THROUGH THE REAR VIEW MIRRORS MAY pliance with the country where operating.
NOT BE EXACTLY AS THEY ARE; THEY MAY SEEM FUR-
- Install a overhanging load signal panel on the boom
THER AWAY OR NEARER THAN THEY ARE IN REALITY.
head before the entering onto the road.
- Always evaluate the itinerary to be covered, taking into
consideration suspended structures (e.g. bridges, under-
passes) that could be damaged by the vehicle.
- In some countries it is mandatory to place wedges under
the tyres when the vehicle is stopped.
- Make sure that the vehicle complies with local regula-
tions regarding number plates when travelling on roads
during both day and night.

- ATTENTION -
ROAD TRANSFER WITH ATTACHMENTS SECURED ON
THE FORK HOLDING PLATE OTHER THAN THOSE PER-
MITTED BY THE LAW IN THE COUNTRY WHERE THE
VEHICLE IS USED IS PROHIBITED.

- ATTENTION -
OPERATING THE VEHICLE ON THE ROAD WHEN IT IS
CARRYING A LOAD IS PROHIBITED.

B/16
HOISTING THE MACHINE TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE
- Disassemble any attachments from the machine. - Before transporting the machine, ensure that the rules
and regulations of every area the machine will travel
- Completely retract and lower the boom.
through are complied with.
- When the machine is in position, engage the parking
- Disassemble any attachments from the machine.
brake and position the gear selector in neutral "N".
- Completely retract and lower the boom.
- Close the windows and lock the door of the cab.
- Before loading the machine onto the means of transport,
- Ensure that the hoisting mechanism has a suitable ca-
ensure there is no grease, ice or other slippery substan-
pacity for the weight of the machine before attempting to
ces on the machine or the ramp.
hoist it. The weight of the machine is displayed on a plate.
- Ensure the brake is engaged on the tractor and the trailer.
- Ensure the safety instructions regarding the transport
platform have been applied correctly before loading the
machine and that the driver of the means of transport is
informed about the overall dimensions and weight of the
telescopic handler.
- Load and unload the machine on solid and level ground.
- Check the overall dimensions for the maximum and mi-
nimum heights above ground and the permitted weight.
Check the authorised soil contact pressure for the
platform compared to the machine.
- Always ensure the devices used to anchor the machine - Load the machine on the means of transport (ensure the
(cables, chains, wedges, etc.) are in good condition; en- ramps are correctly and safely positioned).
sure they are not worn, broken or twisted.
- Load the machine parallel to the platform.
- Check the capacity of the anchors before hoisting the
- Manoeuvre the machine with caution onto the means of
machine.
transport.
- Check the overall dimensions of the machine.
- When the machine is in a safe position, engage the par-
- Use the hoisting points illustrated in the figure and mar- king brake and position the gear selector in neutral "N".
ked on the machine with the appropriate symbols.
- Place wedges under the front and rear of the tyres on the
- Before hoisting the machine, ensure there are no unau- machine. Anchor the machine to the means of transport
thorised people in the surrounding area. with cables or chains. Tighten the cables and/or chains.
- Bear in mind the location of the centre of gravity of the - Close the windows and lock the door of the cab.
telehandler.
- Slowly hoist the machine with the utmost care.

- Use the anchor points illustrated in the figure and mar-


ked on the machine with the appropriate symbols.
- Always ensure the devices used to anchor the machine
(cables, chains, wedges, etc.) are in good condition and
that the capacity of the means of transport is suitable for
the weight to handle.

- ATTENTION -
Carefully comply with all the steps described above to
ensure the machine is transported safely.

B/17
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE

- If supplementary equipment is installed by the client, the


user must verify if the installation causes any type of in-
terference with vehicle’s instruments.
If this is the case, the user must eliminate this interference.

It is important to pay careful attention to mobile attachments


such as radio communications (telephones) which must be
installed by specialised technicians and used with externally
mounted antennas.

In general, all additional electrical equipment installed must


comply with EMC Directive EC/2004/108 and must carry the
"CE" marking.

VIBRATIONS

Take into consideration the following precautions to reduce


the operator’s exposure to vibrations:

- Always use equipment that is appropriate for the type of
work being performed.

- The driver's seat must be properly adjusted.. In-


spect and, if necessary, repair seat suspensions and
adjustment mechanisms.

- Make sure that the vehicle is kept in good condition, fol-


low vehicle maintenance schedule as described in this
manual.

- Steer, accelerate, brake, change gears, move attach-


ments slowly.

- While driving, adjust vehicle speed to minimise the vi-


bration level. Reduce speed to prevent risk of jolting.
Transport the vehicle if the distance between work sites
is significant.

- Keep the work site in good condition, remove rocks and


obstacles, fill-in depressions or holes, etc.

- To avoid back problems, use the vehicle only if in good


health conditions. The operator should take periodic
breaks to reduce the amount of time spent seated in
the same position. Never jump down from the cab or the
vehicle. Avoid repeatedly handling and lifting loads.

B/18
NOISE

The machine has been designed and realised to reduce the


sound emission level at the origin.
The detected acoustic power data is equal to 104 dB LwA
with reference to Outdoor Noise Directive EC/2000/14
Sources emissions in the environment of equipment and
machines working outdoors.

- ATTENTION -
THE GIVEN NOISE VALUES ARE EMISSION LEVELS
AND DO NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT SAFE
OPERATIONAL LEVELS.

The factors determining the level of exposure to which the


work force is subjected, include the duration of exposure,
the work areas and other eventual sources of noise (diffe-
rent manufacturing and equipment, background noise, etc.);
furthermore, the admitted levels of exposure can vary from
country to country.

During manufacturing, the users must use suitable Individual


Protection Devices as indicated in the dedicated paragraph.

B/19
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

PERFORMING MAINTENANCE WORK SAFELY

- Do not leave tools or other instruments laying around in


a disorderly fashion at the work site. Clean traces of gre-
ase, oil and other substances that could cause slipping.
Always keep the work site clean and organised in order
to guarantee safe operation of the vehicle. .
- Always deposit cloths soaked with grease and/or inflam-
mable materials in a safe container to ensure safety at
the work site.
- Only use attachments that are appropriate for the job
and ensure their proper use. The use of damaged, de-
fective, unsuitable and poor quality equipment may cau-
se serious injury.
- Do not hit the vehicle or its parts with a hammer or any
other instrument, as projected fragments could cause
injury.
- If inspection or maintenance is carried out on vehicles
which are still covered with mud, oil, etc., operators risk
sliding or falling and the analysis of components is made
more difficult. Carefully clean the vehicle before repair or
maintenance work is carried out.

Before performing maintenance work on your vehicle, do


the following:

Park the vehicle on flat, even ground.


Lower and completely retract the boom.
Keep the boom raised and mount the safety rod if main-
tenance work must be carried out with the boom raised.
Run the engine at a minimum for 60 seconds to cool it
down.
Switch off the key in the ignition switch.
Remove the key from the ignition.
Release any residual pressure from the hydraulic sy-
stem, by repeatedly moving the hydraulic distribution
levers with the engine switched off.
Hang up a sign that indicates maintenance work is un-
derway. This sign can be hung on the manipulators or
the cab door.
Set up barriers and spacers to prevent unauthorised per-
sonnel from approaching the vehicle.
Disconnect the battery isolator switch.
Allow the engine to cool down.

- Ensure you are familiar with maintenance procedures


before starting work.
- Keep the work zone clean and dry.
- Do not lubricate parts or carry out maintenance work
when the vehicle is in motion.

B/20
- Never carry out maintenance on a moving vehicle.
If maintenance needs carrying out with the engine run-
ning, it must be carried out only by personnel autho-
rised by the Dealer or directly by the Manufacturer,
DIECI s.r.l.

Request assistance of at least two workers and follow the


instructions below:
One worker must always be seated in the driver's seat,
ready to switch off the engine at any time.
All workers must remain in contact with one another.
- ATTENTION -
Take care not to remain entrapped in components during
the execution of operations performed on the fan, belt or DAMAGE MAY BE CAUSED BY ENTANGLEMENT IN
other rotating parts. MOVING PARTS. PREVENT ACCIDENTS WHILE YOU
ARE WORKING BY ENSURING THAT, HANDS, FEET,
Do not touch levers or control pedals. Should a lever or CLOTHING, JEWELLERY AND HAIR CANNOT GET
pedal need to be moved, always warn operators first so CAUGHT IN MOVING PARTS.
they can move out of harm’s way.
Do allow instruments or other objects to fall into the ve-
hicle’s rotating parts, as these parts may break and be
projected out causing danger.

- If you need to perform repair or maintenance work under


the vehicle, firmly support the equipment being used and
the vehicle with blocks that are solid enough to support
the weight.
- Store attachments removed from the vehicle in a safe
place where they do not risk falling. Take precautions to
prevent unauthorized persons from approaching the sto-
rage area.
- DANGER -
- Do not rest metal parts on the battery.
EXHAUST GASES FROM THE ENGINE ARE TOXIC AND
- Disconnect the battery wires before working on the elec- CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR HEALTH.
trical system or before carrying out arc welding on the
vehicle.
- DANGER -
- Welding operations must always be carried out by quali-
THE VEHICLE MUST BE OUTDOORS WHEN
fied welders and in areas equipped with suitable equip-
THE ENGINE IS RUNNING.
ment. There is danger of gas leaks, fire or electrocution
during welding operations; Do not allow unqualified per- THE VEHICLE CAN BE KEPT IN A CLOSED AREA ONLY
sonnel to carry out such operations. IF IT IS PROPERLY VENTILATED AND THE VEHICLE
IS EQUIPPED WITH SPECIAL PURIFIERS.
- When carrying out electric welding, connect the earth of
the welding machine as close as possible to the area to
be welded, and prevent the electric current from passing
through ball bearings, articulated joints, hydraulic cylin-
ders or sliding parts. If welding must be done in proximi-
ty to the oil or fuel tank, empty the tanks before welding.

- ATTENTION -
IF YOU NEED TO WORK UNDER THE RAISED MOBILE
PARTS (BOOMS, SHOVELS, ETC.) OF THE VEHICLE,
BLOCK THEM USING SPACERS PLACED ON THE
CYLINDER RODS OR LEAN THEM UP AGAINST APPRO-
PRIATELY SIZED SUPPORTS.

B/21
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

- Replace any worn or broken components. - Use a piece of cardboard to check for any leaks; ensure your
hands and body are protected against pressurised fluids.
- Eliminate any accumulations of grease, oil or deposits.
- Any fluids injected under the skin must be removed surgical-
- After the machine has been used, the engine coolant will
ly. If there is an accident, seek medical attention immediately.
be hot and pressurised. Any contact with hot water and/
or steam may cause serious burns. - Do attempt to loosen fittings, hoses or hydraulic compo-
nents while the circuit is pressurised.
- Avoid any possible injury caused by hot water jets. Do
not remove the radiator cap until the engine has cooled - Never touch the coolant in the air conditioner. If the
down. To open, unscrew the cap as far as possible. Be- coolant in the air conditioner squirts into the eyes, it can
fore removing the cap, release any pressure. cause blindness; if it touches the skin, it can cause free-
zing phenomena.
- To prevent burns caused by oil or other red hot parts
while checking or unloading, allow the oil to cool down - Cleaning with compressed air poses the risk of serious
(you should be able to touch the cap with your hand) be- injury caused by flying particles. Always wear safety gog-
fore starting work. Even when the oil has cooled down, gles, a dust mask, gloves and other safety equipment.
unscrew the cap very gently to release the inside pres-
sure before removing.
- ATTENTION -
CHANGING THE ADJUSTMENT AND/OR DISASSEM-
BLING BALANCING VALVES AND SAFETY VALVES CAN
BE DANGEROUS.

ONE OF THE AFOREMENTIONED VALVES CAN ONLY


BE DISASSEMBLED IF THE RELATIVE JACK IS AT A
STANDSTILL AND IF THERE IS NO PRESSURE IN THE
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT.

THIS OPERATION CAN ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY AU-


THORISED PERSONNEL.
- ATTENTION -
- Only use the lubricants indicated by DIECI, never use
BEWARE OF BURNS; THE ENGINE OIL OF THE REDUC- used lubricants.
TION GEARS AND THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, AS WELL
AS THE PIPES, ENGINE AND OTHER COMPONENTS
BECOME VERY HOT WHEN THE MACHINE IS IN USE.
WAIT UNTIL ALL PARTS COOL DOWN BEFORE STAR-
TING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR WORK.

- Fluids such as fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure can


penetrate the skin and eyes causing serious injuries.
Avoid these risks while carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance on the machine.
- Discharge any pressure (using the hydraulic levers of
the distributors) before disconnecting or repairing pipes
or hydraulic parts.
- Do attempt to loosen fittings, hoses or hydraulic compo-
nents while the circuit is pressurised.
- Before restarting the engine, ensure that all fittings have
been properly tightened.

B/22
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE CLEANING THE WINDOWS

- Switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition - The cab windows, headlamps and rear-view mirrors
and wait for the various components to cool down. must be washed frequently with soapy water.
- Wear appropriate protective clothing (gloves, mask, - After you have cleaned these components, dry carefully.
overalls, etc.) Do not leave any stains or halos that may limit or distort
the operator's view.
- Do not use inflammable liquids, acids or products that
may chemically corrode machine components.
- Do not clean moving or hot parts; allow the parts to cool CLEANING THE CAB
because they could be damaged by abrupt changes in
temperature. - Clean the soft upholstery in the cab with a cloth that has
- To clean the exterior of the machine and the engine been immerged in a solution of water and detergent and
compartment, use a power washer bearing in mind the then tightly squeezed.
following: - Clean the driver ’s seat and the floor with a vacuum
cleaner and/or a stiff brush. If necessary, use a damp
Ensure the filler caps are closed properly (radiator, oil
cloth to remove any stubborn stains.
tank, fuel tank, etc.)
Protect control units and connectors from water seepage.
- ATTENTION -
Do not use water temperatures or pressures over 80°C DO NOT USE JETS OF WATER INSIDE THE CAB.
and 100 bar respectively.
Do not hold the power washer nozzle less than 40 cm - Clean the seat-belts with a sponge dipped in hot soapy
from the surface you are washing. water and simply leave them to dry.
Do not concentrate the jet in just one place, wash using - The fabric seats should be cleaned with a stiff brush or vacu-
large strokes. um cleaner. Plastic seats should be cleaned with a damp cloth.
The interior of the machine is delicate and must never be
cleaned with a power washer.
SAFETY STICKERS

- Consult the summary table in the chapter “MAINTENAN-


CE” for the inspection schedule.
- Replace any Danger, Caution, Hazard or instruction
stickers that are illegible or missing.
- Read all the safety warnings on the machine and comply
with their contents before starting, running, refuelling or
carrying out maintenance work. Clean said warnings if
covered in mud, cement or other deposits. Do not remove
- If any water accidentally falls on the electrical system, for any reason. If damaged, lost or illegible, replace im-
the machine will not function correctly. Do not use water mediately. Orders must be placed using the same process
or steam to clean the electrical system, sensors or con- as for spare parts (ensure you include the model and se-
nectors. rial number of the machine when you place your order).
- To repair any small defects on the bodywork, ask your - The location and code numbers of the safety stickers are illu-
DIECI dealer for tins of touch up paint. Ensure all the strated in chapter "B – SAFETY STANDARDS" in this manual.
stickers are present; replace any stickers that are lost or
removed while cleaning.

B/23
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

STORINGTHEMACHINE/PROLONGEDINACTIVITY
Before a six month period of machine inactivity, the following
precautions should be observed:
Clean the vehicle.
Touch up paint where necessary to prevent rust.
Lubricate all greasing nipples.
Check to see if there are any worn or damaged parts on
the vehicle and replace them if necessary.
Drain the oil from the engine and replace it with new oil.
Clean the fuel system and change the filter cartridges.
Empty the normal fuel tank and fill it with ten litres of
special prolonged inactivity fuel. Run the engine for ten
minutes so the new solution can distribute evenly.
Drain the coolant from the radiator and the cylinder block
and refill them with a solution made of antifreeze and
water.
Remove any attachments.
Realign the turret.
Completely lower the boom.
Remove the battery and store it in a warm, dry place.
Recharge it periodically.
Raise the vehicle onto tripods to take the weight off the
tyres.
Cover the exhaust opening.
Cover the exposed rods of the hydraulic cylinders with a
thin layer of grease.
Close and lock all windows.
Close and lock the door.

PREPARATION AFTER PROLONGED INACTIVITY


Inflate tyres with the correct pressure.
Remove the tripods from the axles.
Fill the fuel tank.
Check the radiator coolant level. .
Check various oil levels.
Insert a fully charged battery.
Remove exhaust pipe cover.
Remove the layer of grease from the exposed cylinder
rods.
Switch on the engine and make sure all controls are wor-
king properly.
Leave the engine running at minimum speed without a
load for a few minutes.
Make sure the brakes are working properly.

B/24
FIRE PREVENTION

- ATTENTION -
Stop the machine immediately if an alarm lights up in
the cab. Contact your DIECI service centre and do not
operate the machine until the fault has been repaired.

- Before every work cycle, ensure there are no leaks from


the machine; fuel, oil, grease or lubricants in general can
start fires and cause serious injury.
- ATTENTION -
- Regularly check there are no loose or missing clamps,
IF A FIRE DEVELOPS, IMMEDIATELY ABANDON THE
no twisted hoses or hoses that are rubbing together.
MACHINE AND FIND A SAFE PLACE; IF POSSIBLE TURN
THE IGNITION TO "0" (ENGINE AND INSTRUMENTS OFF)
- Do not bend any pipes under pressure. Never install da-
BEFORE ABANDONING THE MACHINE.
maged pipes.

- Remove inflammable materials such as fuel, oil, grease,


waste, deposits, accumulated dust or any other compo- - ATTENTION -
nents that can start a fire. ONLY TRY TO PUT OUT THE FIRE IF IT IS SMALL AND IF
YOU HAVE AN OF A CORRECTLY MAINTAINED
- Avoid short circuits; they can cause fires. EFFICIENT EXTINGUISHER

- Regularly clean and secure all electrical connections.


Before every work shift, ensure there are no twisted,
hardened or damaged electricity cables. If there is a mal-
- ATTENTION -
function, do not start the machine and contact a DIECI IF THE FIRE DIRECTLY INVOLVES THE OIL OR FUEL
service centre. TANK, ABANDON THE MACHINE IMMEDIATELY;
THE MACHINE COULD EXPLODE.
- Regularly check the ignition switch. A fault when stop-
ping the engine will obstruct the work of the fire brigade.

- When cleaning parts with oil, use non-inflammable oil.


Diesel and petrol fuel can catch fire. Do not use.

- Do not weld or use a cutting torch to cut pipes that con-


tain inflammable liquids.

- When checking the level of fuel, oil, battery electrolyte,


windscreen wiper liquid or coolant, always use an ex-
plosion proof light source. If other types of lighting are
used, there is a risk of explosion.

B/25
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

BATTERIES - Do not overturn or tilt the battery to avoid acid leakage.

- Charge the battery in a well-ventilated place and AL-


WAYS disconnect the power supply before disconnec-
ting the terminals.

- Always use a voltmeter or a densimeter to check the


battery charge. Use a torch to check the electrolyte
level, never a naked flame. Never place anything me-
tallic between the terminals to check the battery charge.

- DO NOT generate any sparks with the wire terminals


- ATTENTION - while recharging the battery or while starting the engine
with an auxiliary battery.
TO AVOID BATTERY EXPLOSIONS, KEEP SPARKS,
NAKED FLAMES AND CIGARETTES FAR FROM THE - Ensure the caps and air vents are correctly assembled
TOP OF BATTERIES BECAUSE THESE CAN PRODUCE and firmly tightened.
HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE GASES.
- Clean the upper part of the battery, ensure the clamps are
firmly assembled and cover with a thin layer of Vaseline.

- If the battery freezes, put in a warm place to defrost. Do


not use and do not charge; it could explode.

- In normal conditions, the battery is kept charged by the ma-


chine alternator. If the battery is completely flat through pro-
longed lack of use or because its lifetime is over, the alter-
nator will no longer be able to keep it charged. The battery
must be replaced and recharged using a battery charger.

Charging instructions
- ATTENTION -
1. If possible remove the caps.
THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULPHURIC ACID ELEC-
TROLYTE, A CORROSIVE SUBSTANCE THAT MUST BE 2. Check the electrolyte level.
HANDLED WITH THE UTMOST CAUTION BECAUSE IT
CAN CAUSE POISONING AND SERIOUS BURNS. 3. Clean the poles.

4. Ensure the room is sufficiently ventilated.


KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
5. Limit the charge current to a maximum 1/10 of
AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN OR EYES. the battery capacity (Ah).

6. Connect the battery to the charger.


- ATTENTION - 7. Connect the charger to the power supply mains.
WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND SAFETY GLOVES 8. Switch on the charger.
AND GOGGLES. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH THE
EYES OR SKIN, RINSE IMMEDIATELY WITH ABUNDANT 9. The battery temperature must not exceed 55 °C.
WATER AND CONSULT A DOCTOR. IF SWALLOWED,
CONSULT A DOCTOR. 10. When the battery has finished charging, disconnect
the battery charger.

11. Disconnect the charger from the power supply mains.

12. Disconnect the battery from the charger.

13. Check the electrolyte level.

14. Reinstall the caps.

B/26
- Do not charge damaged batteries. Danger of explosion. STARTING UP WITH AUXILIARY BATTERIES
- Do not charge a hot battery. Danger of explosion.
- A battery is completely charged if at a constant tempe- - ATTENTION -
rature, the density of the electrolyte and the measured Two adequately trained and qualified people are requi-
voltage at the poles does not increase within 2 hours. red to start the engine using an auxiliary battery.
- Every charge is as good as the general condition of the Any mistakes during this procedure can cause serious
battery. This means that the charge of an old battery will not damage to the machine, things and people.
achieve the same lifetime and efficiency as a new battery.
- The most straightforward charge method is the constant - When starting the engine from another machine, con-
power charge. nect the batteries in parallel. When connecting the ca-
- When charging is over, the charger voltage increases bles, avoid contact between the positive cable “+” and
and creates gasification. It is advisable to use straightfor- the negative cable “-“.
ward chargers with minimum current control and a timer - Ensure you are wearing appropriate protective clothing
to switch the charger off. before carrying out any procedures.
- If the battery has a low electrolyte level, top up to the minimum - Take care to avoid contact between the machine to be
level (just above the limit of the plates) and then charge. After started up and the machine that has to supply the power,
ending the charge, fill to the maximum level (to avoid leaks). to avoid sparks and consequently explosions caused by
the hydrogen produced by the batteries. If the battery
Do not overcharge because: explodes, it could cause serious damage and injury.
a) It is a waste of energy that causes water disassociation. - Ensure you never accidentally switch the starting cables and con-
b) It produces a loss of active mass due to the deterioration nect first the ground lead (-) and lastly the positive voltage lead (+).
of the electrodes.
c) It creates a danger of explosion. - Use great care when removing the starting cables; en-
sure that when the cables are disconnected from the
- If the sulphated batteries are charged without a voltage battery they do not touch other parts of the machine to
limit, they will reach boiling point and overheat. prevent hydrogen explosions.
- Charge old batteries with the utmost caution (they will
probably be sulphated batteries). Even at 13.8 Volt, the- - ATTENTION -
re is the risk of an increase in temperature. THE CABLES AND THE CLIPS MUST BE SIZED ACCOR-
DING TO THE POWER CHARGE TO BE TRANSFERRED.
- ATTENTION -
All these procedures must be carried out by competent THE CAPACITY OF THE BATTERY USED TO START THE
and trained staff. MACHINE MUST BE GREATER OR AT LEAST EQUAL TO
THE CAPACITY OF THE BATTERY ON THE MACHINE.
- ATTENTION -
Batteries contain substances that are particularly hazardous - ATTENTION -
pollutants and must not be disposed of in the environment. ENSURE THE CABLES AND CLIPS ARE NOT CORRO-
Uncharged, old, damaged, etc. batteries must be dispo- DED OR DAMAGED.
sed of appropriately.
ENSURE THE CLIPS GRIP THE TERMINALS FIRMLY.
Low maintenance batteries
- ATTENTION -
Low maintenance batteries are designed to avoid mainte-
nance during ordinary and normal battery use. If the battery TAKE THE UTMOST CARE DURING THE VARIOUS PROCE-
is flat, check the electrolyte level and follow the instructions DURES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT CONTACT WITH LIVE PARTS
in the paragraph “BATTERY”. Please consult the supplier or CAN CAUSE INJURY AND SOMETIMES EVEN DEATH.
manufacturer for technical specifications.
- ATTENTION -
Maintenance-free batteries WHEN THE ENGINE IS STARTED, THE OPERATOR
MUST BE SEATED IN THE DRIVER’S SEAT TO ENSURE
These types of battery do not require any maintenance. THE MACHINE IS UNDER HIS OR HER CONTROL.
When the battery is flat, it must be replaced. Please consult
the supplier or manufacturer for technical specifications.

- ATTENTION -
DO NOT CARRY OUT ANY MAINTENANCE OR ATTEMPT
TO RECOVER MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERIES.

B/27
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

Connecting the cables and starting the engine ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OVERLOAD PROTECTION

1. Ensure the ignition key is in position “O”. - ATTENTION -


2. Connect the positive poles “+” on the two batteries “A”. Burnt fuses must be replaced
3. Connect the cable on the negative terminal “-“ of the charged with another fuse of the same type.
battery to the ground block on the machine to be started up “B”. Other types of repairs are forbidden, even if temporary.
4. Start up the engine of the machine that is working properly
- Do not connect or remove terminals, fuses or connectors
and rev up the engine.
while the machine is running or being electrically powered.
5. Start the engine of the machine that has broken down.
- ATTENTION -
Removing the cables Any work on the electrical system must be carried out
while the machine is disconnected from the power supply.
With the engine running, remove the cables in the reverse Do not restore the power supply until the work has been
order in which they were connected. completed and all covers and protection devices have
been reassembled.
1. Disconnect the negative cable (-) from the ground block on
the started engine and then from battery “B”. - Act on the battery cut-out to disconnect the power sup-
2. Disconnect the positive cable “+” first from the battery used ply to the machine.
to start up and then from the battery of the machine with the - Also disconnect the power supply by acting on the batte-
flat battery. “A”. ry cut-out before replacing the battery.
- If a connector is damaged or no longer enters its housing,
replace immediately to avoid short circuits, sparks, etc.

- ATTENTION -
Damaged, pinched or burnt cables must be replaced im-
mediately even if the damage only concerns the sheath
Charged Flat or external insulation.
battery battery
- Never connect or disconnect the charge circuit (inclu-
ding battery connections) while the engine is running.
Engine block - Never short circuit at the ground (earth) any charge
to start components.
- Do not use an auxiliary battery with a rated voltage abo-
ve 12 Volts.
- Always ensure the polarity is correct when installing bat-
- ATTENTION -
teries or using an auxiliary battery to start up using jump
ALL THESE PROCEDURES MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY cables. Comply with the instructions in the use and main-
COMPETENT AND TRAINED STAFF. tenance manual when starting the machine with jump ca-
bles. Connect positive to positive and negative to negative.
- Always disconnect the negative cable from the batteries
before carrying out any arc welding on the machine or
any attachments connected to it.
- Position the welder ground terminal as close as possible
to the area to weld.

- ATTENTION -
If the welding needs to be carried out near an electrical
module, the module must be removed from the machine.
Ensure this procedure is carried out by qualified and
authorised personnel.

- Ensure the welder cables are not above, near or cross


any electrical cables or electronic components while
welding is being carried out.

B/28
TIGHTENING WHEEL NUTS Tyre pressure table

- Tighten nuts in accordance with the schedule provided in MISURA PNEUMATICO CARATTERISTICHE
the maintenance table TYRES DIMENSIONS DETAILS
DIMENSION DES PNEUS CARATTERISTIQUES BAR
- When tightening the wheel nuts, torque should be as follows: DIMENSION DE LOS NEUMATICOS CARACTERISTICAS
REIFENMASS EIGENSHAFTEN

Wheel stud 18 kgm 50


17.5 - 25 7.0
Wheel stud 22 kgm 60
16.0 - 25 9.0

- Always tighten the nuts positioned opposite each other, 18.0 - 25 6.0

not consecutively. 23.5 - 25 5.0

- After having remounted the wheel, tighten the nuts


between the wheel and axles. Check that nuts are tighte-
ned each day until torque has stablised.

- ATTENTION -
THE NUMBER OF AXLE STUDS MUST CORRESPOND
TO THE NUMBER OF TIGHTENED NUTS.THEREFORE
ALL NUTS MUST BE MOUNTED IN ON EACH TYRE;
OTHERWISE THE VEHICLE WILL NOT OPERATE.

- In the event of tyre replacement, the vehicle or the lif-


ted side can be set back on the ground only with tyres
mounted and properly tightened. - Check the size of the tyres installed and the ply number
to ensure they are inflated to the correct pressure.
- ATTENTION - - To ensure maximum efficiency do not use tyres with
NUT TIGHTENING MUST BE CARRIED OUT FIRST WITH THE more than 80% of tyre tread wear.
VEHICLE, OR PARTS OF IT, LIFTED FROM THE GROUND,
AND THEN WITH THE VEHICLE ON THE GROUND. - ATTENTION -
- Only use original DIECI nuts to tighten the wheels. Inflating or working on tyres can be dangerous.
Should even just a single nut be lost, contact the DIECI Whenever possible, have specialised personnel intervene
service centre. on or install tyres. To prevent serious or mortal injury,
follow the safety precautions described below.

- Vehicle tyres are very heavy. Handle with care and ensu-
TYRES re that, once stored, they cannot fall and injure anyone.
- Never attempt to repair a tyre on a public road or motorway.
- ATTENTION -
- Make sure that the car jack is positioned on a solid, flat
UPON RECEIPT OF THE VEHICLE, surface.
CHECK TYRE AIR PRESSURE.
- Make sure that the jack is suitable to support the weight
- Check tyre pressure every 100 hours and every two we- of the vehicle.
eks. Pressure should be checked when the tyres are cold. - Use jack tripods or other locking devices suitable for
- Before each use, verify that the sides of the tyres are not supporting the vehicle while repairing tyres.
damaged. - Never place any part of your body under the vehicle.
- Never start up the vehicle while it is on the jack.
- ATTENTION -
- Never hit a tyre with a rim or hammer.
TYRES THAT ARE TORN OR ARE EXCESSIVELY WORN
SHOULD BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. - Make sure that the rim is clean, and that there is no rust
or damage. Do not weld, braze, repair or use a damaged
- Keep all oils, grease and corrosive liquids far from the rim in any way.
tyres to prevent any damage to the rubber.
- Tyre pressure must be kept at the level indicated in the
table. The tyre pressure given corresponds to the re-
commendations of the manufacturer, and should there-
fore be respected as far as possible.

B/29
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

Replacing a tyre on the road

- When a tyre must replaced along the road, proceed as


follows:

If possible, park the vehicle on flat, even ground.

Engage the parking brake.

Switch off the engine.

Engage emergency lights.

Put wedges under tyres opposite from the tyre to be re-


placed in order to block the vehicle from moving in both
directions.

Loosen the bolts of the tyre to be replaced.

Place the jack under the half-box of the axle, as close as


possible to the tyre.

Lift the tyre until it comes off the ground; position the sa-
fety support under the axle.

Completely unscrew the bolts from the tyre and remove


them.
- ATTENTION -
WHEN MOUNTING A NEW OR REPAIRED TYRE, USE AN Remove the tyre with "push and pull" rotating move-
ADAPTER FOR THE SPRING VALVE WITH A DISTANCE ments.
MANOMETER WHICH ALLOWS THE OPERATOR TO
KEEP AWAY FROM THE TYRE DURING INFLATION. Insert the new tyre on the hub.
USE A SAFETY FENCE SYSTEM.
Manually screw in bolts. Lubricate them with grease if
- Do not inflate a tyre unless the rim is mounted on the ve- necessary. Tighten bolts securely with a torque wrench.
hicle or secured so that it will not move in the event that
the tyre or rim should suddenly break. Remove the safety support and lower the telehandler
with the jack.
- Never inflate tyres in excess of the pressure indicated
by DIECI. If the heel does not settle on the rim when this Re-tighten bolts to the tyre securely with a torque
pressure level is reached, deflate the tyre and lubricate wrench.
with a soapy water solution, then inflate again. Do not
use oil or grease. Inflation exceeding the permitted level
on unsettled heels can cause heel or rim breakage with
an explosive force that can cause serious injury.

- PROHIBITION -
DO NOT MOUNT INFLATED TYRES WITH POLYURETHANE
FOAM UNLESS AUTHORISED BY THE MANUFACTURER.

- Do not re-inflate a tyre which has completely turned or


that is very deflated until it has been properly inspected
by a qualified technician.
- After having remounted the wheel, tighten the nuts
between the wheel and axles. Check that nuts are tighte-
ned each day until torque has stablised.

B/30
STORING DANGEROUS FLUIDS
- Handle fuels carefully; they are highly inflammable. If
fuel is ignited, there may be an explosion and/or fire.

- Beware of the fumes and vapours produced by chemical


products. Do not inhale.
- Do not inhale combustion fumes.
- Ensure these chemical products are not dispersed in the
soil, sewers or surface water. If necessary, inform the
- ATTENTION - competent local authorities.
All fuels, the majority of lubricants
- In case of fire, use carbon dioxide, dry chemical powder,
and some types of antifreeze are inflammable.
foam, water mist, sand or earth. Use jets of water to cool
surfaces exposed to the fire.
- All inflammable fluids must be stored in special contai-
ners and the contents clearly indicated. The containers - Ensure the storage containers do not leak inflammable
must be airtight. fluids (fuel, oil, grease, lubricants in general).

- ATTENTION -
CONTACT WITH DANGEROUS FLUIDS
All fluids must be stored out of reach of children and
unauthorised personnel. - Avoid contact with the skin or eyes.
- Different fluids must not be mixed together. - Wear appropriate protective clothing.
- In case of contact with the eyes, rinse immediately with
- ATTENTION - plenty of water for a few minutes holding the eyelids
open and then consult a doctor.
All chemical products are generally toxic; avoid contact
with the skin and eyes by wearing suitable protective - In case of contact with the skin, wash the area carefully
clothing. Do not swallow. with soap and water, remove any contaminated clothing,
and if the skin tends to be dry, apply a moisturising cream.
- In case of inhalation, leave the contaminated area and
reach a well-ventilated location. Consult a doctor in case
of respiratory problems.
- If swallowed, consult a doctor. Show the doctor the label
or the container. Do not provoke vomiting to avoid the
risk of inhaling the product through the respiratory tract.

- ATTENTION -
Store inflammable fluids in an especially reserved, well-ven-
tilated storeroom, far from heat sources, sparks and flames.
Keep containers closed and indoors.
There must be no other substances inside the inflam-
mable fluids storeroom (e.g. food).

- Always fill the tank in the open air.

B/31
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

DIESEL RECOMMENDED FUEL SPECIFICATIONS


- Before handling fuel, filling the tank, etc., comply with To ensure good performance, use a high quality fuel.
the following rules: The recommended fuel specifications are given below.
Never mix other types of fuel with diesel, such as petrol
Cetane number 45 minimum.
or alcohol.
Viscosity 2/4.5 centistokes at 40°C.
Density 0.8201860 kg/litre at 15°C
- ATTENTION -
Sulphur Sulphur 0.20% in weight, maximum.
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO REFUEL Distillation 85% at 350°C.
WITH THE ENGINE SWITCHED ON.
Clean the area around the fuel cap. Fill the fuel tank at
the end of every day to reduce condensation during the Cetane number
work break. The cetane number indicates the ignition capacity.
Water and sediment must be removed before they reach Fuel with a lower cetane number may cause ignition pro-
the engine. blems when the engine is cold and could affect combustion.
Do not use antifreeze to remove water from the diesel fuel.
Do not rely on the filter to remove water from the diesel fuel. Viscosity
Never leave the fuel cap off and always lock. If you lose
the original cap, replace with an original spare part. Not The viscosity value indicates the flow resistance; engine
just any cap will fit. performance can be affected if the viscosity value is not wi-
thin the limits.
Keep an eye on the fuel pump nozzle while filling the tank.

Density
A lower density reduces engine power, higher density in-
creases engine power and the smokiness of the exhaust
fumes.

Sulphur
A high sulphur level wears out the engine and creates pol-
lution.

- ATTENTION - Distillation
DO NOT SMOKE DURING THE AFORESAID OPERATIONS. Distillation indicates the mixture of different hydrocarbons in
the fuel. A high proportion of light hydrocarbons might affect
Do not use a flame to inspect the fuel tank.
the combustion specifications.
Do not fill the tank completely. Leave room for the fuel to
expand and immediately clean any spillage.
Before carrying out any welds on the tank or any components
in close contact with the tank, ensure there is no fuel inside. Fuel for low temperatures
If there are any fuel leaks due to breakages, stop the leak If the engine needs to be used at temperatures below 0°C,
as soon as possible and contact a DIECI service centre. special winter fuels can be used. These fuels have a lower
degree of viscosity and restrict the formation of paraffin in
the fuel. The formation of paraffin prevents the fuel from
passing through the filter.

- ATTENTION -
AVOID INHALING DIESEL VAPOURS; THEY ARE
CARCINOGENIC AND A HEALTH HAZARD.

B/32
CLEANING AND STORING DIESEL FUEL 6. Fuel barrels (see the figure below) must be stored under
cover to prevent water seepage. The barrels should also
It is essential the fuel is kept clean. be tilted slightly, to allow any water to drain off the upper
rim. The fuel barrels must not be stored for too long be-
The advice given below will help to maintain the quality of fore being used.
the fuel.

1. Never use zinc containers.

2. Never clean the inside of fuel containers or fuel system


components with cloths that may leave deposits.

3. The capacity of the fuel storage tank must ensure that


the intervals between one refuelling and the next are not
too long. A capacity of 3,000 litres is sufficient for an ave-
rage sized company.

4. The storage tank (see the figure below) must be covered


and placed on a support high enough to exploit the force
of gravity when refuelling the machine. A tank to collect
any spillage must be located below. It should also be
equipped with a manhole to allow access for cleaning.

7. If the barrels are kept in the open, the cap must be tightly
closed to prevent water seepage.

8. After refilling the fuel tank or barrels, it is advisable to


leave the fuel to stand for at least two hours so that any
water or impurities can deposit before the fuel is used.

5. The delivery tap must be larger at the bottom to trap any


deposits; it should also be equipped with a removable fil-
ter. The tank must be tilted by 40 mm per metre towards
the sediment drain plug.

B/33
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

ECOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS WASTE DISPOSAL

- ATTENTION -
A few helpful recommendations are listed below. Find
out about the current standards and legislation in effect
in your country.
Ask suppliers of lubricating oils, fuels, antifreeze pro-
ducts, detergents, etc. for information on the effects of
these products on people and the environment and the
regulations to be observed when using, storing and di- - Waste material should not be scattered in the environ-
sposing of them. ment but disposed of appropriately. Used lubricants,
batteries, greasy rags, brake pads, etc. must be handed
- Do not refill tanks using unsuitable jerry cans or pres- over to specialised companies authorised to dispose of
surised refuelling systems as they can cause leaks and pollutant waste.
loss of significant amounts of liquid.
- Improper waste disposal is a threat to the environment.
- Modern lubricating oils contain additives. Potentially hazardous waste includes lubricants, fuel,
Do not burn contaminated fuel oils and/or oils used in coolant, filters and batteries.
conventional heating systems.
- Do not dispose of waste on the ground, in sewers or wa-
- Do not spill exhausted engine coolants, engine and terbeds.
transmission lubricating oils, hydraulic oil, brake oil etc.
while pouring or draining them. Store safely until it is - Contact your local authority or waste collection centre for
time to dispose of them in compliance with current legi- information on how to recycle or dispose of waste properly.
slation or local regulations.

- Modern antifreeze fluids and their solutions (e.g.


antifreeze and other additives) should be replaced every
two years. Ensure they do not soak into the soil. They
must be collected and disposed of appropriately.

- Do not work directly on the air conditioning system (op-


tional). Do not open the air conditioning system. It con-
tains gas that must not be released into the atmosphere.
Contact your dealer or an expert who has the equipment
required to refill the system.

- Immediately repair any leak or fault in the cooling or en-


gine hydraulic systems.

- Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised system,


the components may explode.

B/34
B/35
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

CHECKING THE WIND SPEED

- Variations in wind speed can cause several inconvenien-


ces such as loss of machine stability, load oscillation, and
a reduction in visibility due to blowing dust, leaves, etc.

- Other unfavourable factors affecting machine use include:


Site location; the aerodynamic effect of buildings, trees
and other structures increase the wind speed.
The height of the extended boom; the higher the boom,
the higher the wind speed.
Load dimensions; the larger the area occupied by the
load, the more it is affected by the force of the wind.

- ATTENTION -
DIECI telehandlers can be used in wind speeds up to
45 Km/h equal to 12.5 m/s (no. 6 of the Beaufort scale)
measured at ground level.

- ATTENTION -
At a temperature of 10°C, in winds with a speed of 32
Km/h, the sensation of exposed body parts is a tempe-
rature of 0°C; the higher you are the higher the wind
speed and the colder you will feel.

- ATTENTION -
If there is a fresh breeze (fig. 1/B n. 5 in the Beaufort
Scale), never raise loads with a surface area greater
than one square metre.

Below is a graph of the Beaufort scale (fig.1/B) to give an in-


dication of the wind speed at which you can work and when
to suspend work if certain values are exceeded.

THE BEAUFORT WIND SCALE

No DESCRIPTION CONDITIONS SPEED m/s

0 Calm Smoke rises vertically 0 - 0,2

1 Light air Direction of wind shown by smoke drift 0,3 - 1,5

2 Wind felt on face; leaves rustle; 1,6 - 3


Light breeze ordinary vanes moved by wind.
Leaves and small twigs in constant motion; 3-5
3 Gentle breeze wind extends light flag
Raises dust and loose paper;
4 Moderate breeze 5-8
small branches are moved.
Small trees in leaf begin to sway;
5 Fresh breeze 8 - 11
crested wavelets form on inland waters.
Large branches in motion. Whistling heard in
6 Strong breeze 11 - 14
overhead wires. Umbrella use becomes difficult
Whole trees in motion.
7 Near gale 14 - 17
Effort needed to walk against the wind

8 Gale Breaks twigs off trees; generally impedes progress. 17 - 21


Slight structural damage occurs
9 Severe gale 21 - 24
(chimney-pots and slates removed)

(fig.1/B)

B/36
EVALUATE THE CONSISTENCY OF THE GROUND
Type of ground, Allowed surface
The ground on which the telehandler is positioned must be geomorphologic pressure
able to support the machine and its maximum load. specifications Kg/cm2 N/mm2
- ATTENTION - Loose,
non-compacted ground
If the ground under the telehandler collapses,
the machine may roll over. Generally not
Limey, peaty, solid, requires
pasty ground special measures
- Comply with the following indications to avoid overtur-
ning the machine:
Coherent, soft ground
Ask your employer (works manager, construction assi-
stant) if there may be any hidden cavities below the sta- Incoherent, well compacted
2.0 0.2
bilisers (pipelines, wells, old cisterns, basement ceilings, ground, sand, gravel
manure pits, etc.) Solid 1.0 0.1
Coherent Semi solid 2.0 0.2
The operator must evaluate the consistency of the ground
Hard 4.0 0.4
ground, using the tables and graphs provided. In case
of doubt, consult the civil engineer present on the site Rock, concrete, road surface
or seek the advice of an external engineer. suitable for the transit of Over 10.0 Over 1.0
heavy goods vehicles
Depending on the type of ground and its geomorphologic
characteristics, the subsoil can only support a limited (fig. 3/B) Allowed surface pressure on varying ground types
quantity of stress. The table in fig.3/B indicates the allowed
surface pressure underneath the telehandler stabilisers. Allowed surface pressure
Maximum
load
On the basis of the “Maximum pressure exercised on the bearing
capacity Necessary support surface
ground by the stabiliser feet” Table (fig.2/B) and the data
extracted from the table in fig.3/B, “Allowed surface pres-
sure on varying ground types”, it is possible to deduct the
necessary support surface (increased support bases).

- ATTENTION -
Always seek the advice of a civil engineer for the most
reliable and exact evaluation possible of the ground (fig. 4/B) Dimension of the support surface compared
where you intend to work and the dimensions of the to the geomorphic characteristics of the ground
support plates.

- ATTENTION -
On request, DIECI can provide enlarged base supports.

EXTENSION PRESSURE
(mt) (kg/cm)
up to 10 meters 10 kg/cm2

(fig. 2/B) “Maximum pressure exercised on the ground by


the stabiliser feet” Table

B/37
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

SAFETY DEVICES
The vehicle is equipped with certain safety devices that safeguard against improper manoeuvres or carelessness.

Safety device housing inside the cab

E
T OM
1
1
OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

MAX
180W

F D C
ST OP

(fig.7/B)

A Seat microswitch (fig.7/B) E Load monitoring system (fig.7/B)

Hand grip microswitch


B boom joystick (fig.7/B) F Anti-tipping device switch (fig.7/B)

C Emergency push button (fig.7/B) G Parking brake switch (fig.7/B)

Machine functions selector key


D with radio-control or from driver’s seat (fig.7/B)

B/38
Boom up/down limit switch
(Fig.13/B - Pos."1")

(fig.13/B)

Cab emergency exit (rear cab window)


(Fig.14/B)

(fig.14/B)

Valve block in all hydraulic cylinders


(Fig.15/B - Pos."1")

1 1

(fig.15/B)

B/39
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

Safety rod for boom support


(Fig.16/B - Pos."3")

- ATTENTION
The boom support spacer must only be used during routine
maintenance operations.
When carrying out maintenance work on the boom raising 2
cylinder or on the related block valve, the boom must be
supported by a suitable raising mechanism (Minimum capa-
city 5 tons). 1 2
The boom support safety rod is positioned on the upper part
of the vehicle, behind the driver's cab.

The safety rod must be positioned on the lifting cylinder rod


on the telescopic boom as in figure (fig.16/B - Pos."1").
It must always be locked in the correct position by inserting (fig.16/B)
the appropriate nuts and bolt provided by the manufacturers
(fig.16/B - Pos."2"). 3

Electronic control box for boom movements and device to


block pejorative movements
(fig.17/B - Pos."1")

(fig.17/B)

B/40
DRIVING CAB
(Fig.18/B Pos.”1”)

All vehicles are equipped with a driver’s cab that also acts
as a safety cell for the vehicle's operator.

- ATTENTION -
The cab is a safety component and therefore must
always be kept according to proper conditions of use. 1
- PROHIBITION -
Modifying, piercing or altering the cab’s structure
in any way IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
If the cab is tampered with the guarantee is
automatically voided and the manufacturer is
relieved of all liability.

DO NOT weld or mechanically connect components to


the cab chassis. (fig.18/B)

In case you need to replace attachment bolts, only use


elements of the same class of resistance.
Never connect chains or ropes to the cab for towing pur-
poses.
In the vehicle overturns, the operator should not attempt
to exit the driver’s cabin during the accident.

- ATTENTION -
REMAIN INSIDE THE CAB WITH SEAT-BELT
FASTENED FOR BEST PROTECTION.

ROPS-FOPS CAB
(Fig.18/B - Pos. "1")

The vehicle is equipped with a rops- and fops-approved


cab. The operator is therefore protected against overturning
and falling objects, as prescribed for traxcavators.
During use, it is compulsory the use of safety seatbelts to
prevent the driver's impact with the cab inner structures.
The rear windscreen can be used as an emergency exit.
The total opening can be obtained by extracting the spring
clip placed in the opening handle. Opening the window
completely during use of the vehicle IS STRICTLY PROHIB-
ITED, due to possible shearing hazards between boom and
chassis.

- ATTENTION -
If the cab is visIBILY damaged, replace it by
contacting a dieci authorised help center of
repair shop

B/41
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

LOAD TABLES

- ATTENTION -
CHECK THE LOAD TABLES FOR YOUR VEHICLE IN CHAPTER "H”, TECHNICAL SHEETS

The Safe Working Load (SWL) of these vehicles depends on the extension and angle of the boom.

This vehicle is equipped with an anti-tipping device.

For further information on the safe load indicator see the relevant paragraph (in chapter "C" Getting to Know Your Vehicle,
"anti-tipping device").

The load table located inside the cab illustrates the safe working loads in relation to the various positions of the boom.
The boom extension is marked by letters: "A" "B" "C" "D".

The load table illustrates the maximum height and extension achievable without exceeding the safe load.
The telehandler is also equipped with its own load table. The load table shows the admissible load with standard forks.
When certain attachments are fitted on the vehicle the relevant diagram is supplied.

The load table indicated is for reference purposes only.


Before lifting or positioning loads, consult the loading tables. Before lifting or positioning loads, consult the load tables located in
the handbook located on the right of the central dashboard or consult chapter "H" (vehicle technical sheets) in this manual.

- ATTENTION -
The limits given in the load Tables refer to the vehicle at a halt. Do not lift or extend the boom when the vehicle is in motion.
Retract the boom completely and lower it as far as possible before moving the vehicle with a load.
Check which boom attachment has been mounted on the vehicle and then consult the relevant load table.

HERCULES 160.10
PRELIMINARE

10
9.9
60°
E
9
D
50° C
8
B
7 40° A

6
30°
5 16000 kg

4
20°
3
9500

2 10°
4200
5000

12000
6200

14000
7600

0 0°

0
-1
5 4 3 2 1
m

Example “A”

B/42
USING THE LOAD TABLES AND BOOM INDICATORS

- ATTENTION -
For your safety and the safety of the vehicle, follow the instructions provided below.

The load tables relating to your vehicle can be found inside the note pad in the driver’s cab.

- ATTENTION -
The restrictions indicated in the load tables refer to the stopped vehicle on wheels or stabilizers in a level position.
Do not lift or extend the boom when the vehicle is in motion.
Retract the boom completely and lower it as far as possible before moving the vehicle with a load.

Check which boom attachment has been mounted on the vehicle and then consult the relevant load table.

Before proceeding to lift or put down a load, it is essential that you know how much it weighs.

Make sure the centre of gravity of the load does not exceed 600mm measured from the heels of the forks.

- ATTENTION -
The centre of gravity of the load may not necessarily be at the centre, you have to therefore work out its position.

B/43
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

When the weight of the load is known, consult the load table (chapter ”H“ vehicle technical sheets ) and identify the section indi-
cating the weight immediately above.

Example:
in the load table given as an example (fig.19/C), the weight of the load is 6000 kg; go to the section, 6200 tons. (Fig.19/C Pos.“A“).

The left-hand border (fig.19/C Pos.“B“) and the upper border (fig.19/C Pos.“C“) of this segment indicate the stability limits of
the vehicle relative to the considered load. Do not slant or extend the boom beyond the indicated limits. (fig.19/C Pos.“B-C“).

After insertion of forks from under the load and before lifting them, check indicator values of boom angle and extension.

HERCULES 160.10
PRELIMINARE

10
9.9
60°
E
9
C 50° D
8 C
B
7 40° A

5
30°
A 16000 kg

4
20°
3
9500

2 10°

B
4200
5000

12000
6200

14000
7600

0 0°

0
-1
5 4 3 2 1
m

(fig.19/B)

As seen on the table, the lines start from the graduated scale for the angling and extension of the boom and cross the section
of the table. Check where the relevant lines for the parameters considered cross. If the crosspoint is within the maximum load
section or to the right (known load weight), the load is within the safety limits.

If the lines cross above or to the left of the section, do not make any attempt to lift the load. Retract the boom.
If, even with the boom completely retracted, the angular and extension values of the boom intersect outside of the maximum
load section, do not attempt to lift the load.

When the load is on the forks, retract the boom before lifting or lowering it. This will reduce the risk of the vehicle becoming unstable.

When the load is raised (for example, on a scaffolding) it should be let go (raise it) before retracting the boom completely.

Before depositing a load, check the load table to determine the maximum distance of the vehicle from the point of unloading.
It should be possible to deposit the load without intersecting the limits indicated to the left or above the maximum load section.

B/44
Note-book with essential data
(Fig.20/B - Pos."1")

- A: cover page T

1
1
OM

OM I
ACT MAX

- B: gear change page


SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

- C: tyre inflation pressure page


- D: main safety regulation page MAX
180W

- E: driving on public roads page


- F: symbol key (front)
- G: symbol key (back)
ST OP

- H: load charts
H ERCULES160.10
E
PRELIMINAR

- ATTENTION -
9.9

1
10 60° E
D
9
50° C
B
8
A
7 40°

Tables illustrated are only an indication and may not


6 16000 kg
30°
5

4
20°

correspond to those found inside the note pad in the cab.


3

9500
2 10°

12000
14000
7600
5000
6200
4200
1

0 0

-1 1
4 3 2
5
m

(fig.20/B)

MISURA PNEUMATICO CARATTERISTICHE


TYRES DIMENSIONS DETAILS
DIMENSION DES PNEUS CARATTERISTIQUES BAR
DIMENSION DE LOS NEUMATICOS CARACTERISTICAS
REIFENMASS EIGENSHAFTEN

17.5 - 25 7.0
16.0 - 25 9.0
18.0 - 25 8.0
23.5 - 25 5.0

A: cover B: gear change C: tyre inflation pressure D: main safety regulations

LEGENDA SIMBOLI LEGENDA SIMBOLI


SYMBOLS KEY SYMBOLS KEY

HERCULES 160.10
LÉGENDES SYMBOLES LÉGENDES SYMBOLES
LEYENDA SÍMBOLOS LEYENDA SÍMBOLOS
ZEICHENERKLÄRUNG ZEICHENERKLÄRUNG

Stabilizzatori abbassati Stabilizzatori alzati Prolunga a traliccio (Misure) Braccetto con gancio (Misure)
Stabilizers lowered Stabilizers raised Jib (Measurements) Jib (Measurements)
Stabilisateurs abaissés
Estabilizadores bajados
Stabilisateurs relevés
Estabilizadores subidos
Potence (Dimensions) Potence (Dimensions)
Plumin (Medidas)
PRELIMINARE
Plumin (Medidas)
Abgesenkte Stabilisatoren Angehobene Stabilisatoren Gittermastverlängerung (Maße) Gittermastverlängerung (Maße)

In Rotazione continua In Rotazione non continua Cestello Trilaterale fisso Cestello Frontale fisso
Continuous rotation Non-continuous rotation Three-sided fixed basket Front fixed basket
En rotation continue En rotation non continue Nacelle Trilatérale Fixe Nacelle Frontale Fixe 10
9.9
En Rotación continua En Rotación no continua Cesta Trilateral Fija Cesta Frontal Fija 60°
Bei kontinuierlicher Drehung bei nicht kontinuierlicher Drehung Frontaler Arbeitskorb, fest E
Dreiseitiger Arbeitskorb, fest 9
Posizione frontale
D
Cestello Trilaterale Estensibile Cestello Frontale Estensibile 50° C
Front position
Extendable three-sided basket Extendable front Basket 8
Position frontale
NacelleTrilatérale Extensible Nacelle Frontale Extensible B
Posición frontal
Cesta Trilateral Extensible Cesta Frontal Extensible
Frontale Position 7 40° A
Dreiseitiger Arbeitskorb, ausziehbar Frontaler Arbeitskorb, ausziehbar

Vietato lavorare su pneumatici


Argano (Portata) Gancio per piastra portaforche 6
Do not work on tyres
Winch (Capacity) Fork-carrying plate hook
Interdiction de travailler sur pneumatiques
Crochet pour plaque porte-fourches 30°
Prohibido trabajar con la máquina apoyada sólo en los neumáticos
Treuil (Capacitè)
5 16000 kg
Cabrestante (Capacidad) Gancho para placa portahorquillas
Das Ausführen von Arbeiten auf Reifen ist verboten
Winde (Kapazität) Haken für Gabelträgerplatte
Divieto di manovra con macchina non livellata 4
Do not manoeuvre if the machine is not level
Posacentine 20°
Centering handlers
Manœuvres interdites quand la machine n'est pas nivelée
Pose - charpente 3
Prohibido maniobrar con la máquina no nivelada
Coloca - cimbras
9500

Die Maschine darf nur nachAusgleichung der Bodenunebenheiten bewegt werden


Bogenausbau 2 10°
Pressione massima esercitabile sul terreno
4200

Maximum admitted force on the ground


5000

12000
6200

14000
7600

Pression maximum à exercer au sol 1


Presión máxima aplicable sobre el suelo
Max. auf den Untergrund auszuübender Druck 0 0°

0
-1
5 4 3 2 1
m

AXB 1367 AXB 1367

E: Road circulation F: symbol key (front) G: symbol key (back) H: load chart

B/45
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

LOAD HANDLING

Picking a load up from the ground

1. Slowly approach the load to be lifted with the boom com-


pletely retracted and the forks horizontally positioned at
the height of the lifting position.
Keep forks raised just enough to avoid contact with the
ground.

2. Bring forks under load to be lifted until contact is made


with the fork holding plate. Engage the parking brake
and move the gear selector to neutral.

3. Slightly lift up the load and tilt the fork holding plate back-
wards, bringing it to the transport position.

- ATTENTION -
Always respect the load's centre of gravity, slant the
forks just enough to ensure stability and prevent
load loss during braking.

- ATTENTION -
Never transport a load with the boom
raised and/or extended

B/46
Lifting loads from high up

1. Ensure the forks can be easily inserted under the load.

2. Slowly and cautiously drive the machine perpendicularly


towards the load with horizontal forks.

3. Always remember to maintain the distance necessary to in-


sert the forks under the load between the pile and the ma-
chine. Extend the boom over the shortest possible length.

4. After inserting the forks under the load so that contact is


made with the fork holder plate, engage the parking bra-
ke and shift the gear selector to neutral.

5. Raise the load slightly and tilt the fork holder plate back-
wards into the carrying position.

6. If possible, lower the load without moving the machine.


Raise the boom to distance the load, then retract the
extensions and position the load in the carrying position.

7. If it is not possible to reverse the machine very slowly


and with the utmost care, after adequately distancing the
load, retract the extensions and lower the boom to posi-
tion the load in the carrying position.

- ATTENTION -
Always comply with the centre of gravity of the load,
tilt the forks enough to ensure stability and to avoid
dropping the load when braking.

- PROHIBITION -
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO PICK UP A LOAD IF
THE MACHINE IS NOT LEVEL.

- ATTENTION -
Never carry loads while the boom is raised and/or
extended.

B/47
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

Placing loads in high places

1. Place the load in the carrying position in front of the pile.

2. Raise and extend the boom until the load is above the
pile. If necessary, advance the machine towards the pile
very slowly and with the utmost care.

3. Engage the parking brake and shift the gear selector to neutral,

4. Position the load horizontally and place on top of the pile, lo-
wer and retract the extensions to position the load correctly.

5. Release the forks by alternately retracting the extensions


and raising the boom; if possible reverse the machine
very slowly and with the utmost care.

- ATTENTION -
Always comply with the centre of gravity of the load,
tilt the forks enough to ensure stability and to avoid
dropping the load when braking.

- PROHIBITION -
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO PICK UP A LOAD IF
THE MACHINE IS NOT LEVEL.

- ATTENTION -
Never carry loads while
the boom is raised and/or extended.

B/48
Picking up round-shaped loads

- Tilt the forks forward and detract the telescopic boom. At


the same time, place the forks under the load, and turn
the fork holding plate backwards in order to slide the
load. If necessary, secure the load with wedges.

- ATTENTION -
Always respect the load's centre of gravity, slant the
forks just enough to ensure stability and prevent
load loss during braking.

- ATTENTION -
Never transport a load with the boom
raised and/or extended

B/49
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

SAFETY STICKERS
Safety stickers have been placed on the vehicle in indicated positions. Their purpose is to supply a guide for preserving your
safety and the safety of others. Before starting to operate the vehicle, verify the content and positioning of safety stickers by
looking around the vehicle with this manual in hand. Re-examine stickers with all operators who will use the vehicle.

- Make sure that all operators have fully understood positioning and content.

- To ensure correct interpretation, verify that they are located in the correct position and that they are always kept clean.
Cleaning the stickers on the vehicle with solvents or petrol IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN as the stickers may fade.
Additional warning and safety stickers must always be treated in the same way.

- In the stickers are worn, damaged or lost of replace them, as these must be read and interpreted correctly. Sticker must
be ordered in the same manner as spare parts (make sure you provide the model and serial number of the vehicle when
placing the order).

- If in doubt, contact the nearest agent or dealer.

AXA1814
A C 1

B 2 AXA1499
AXA1425
2
A B
AXB1814

3 3
1 B

AXA1163

AXA1163

AXA1506

AXA 1506

AXA1773

B/50
AXA1493 AXA2090 AXA1431

BAR -,- BAR -,-

AXA2073

AXA1431

AXA2104

AXA1432

AXA1432 AXA2089 AXA1427 AXA1433 AXA1434 AXA1498

AXA1515 AXA1514 AXA1438 AXA1431


AXA1431
BAR -,-

AXA1493

AXA1432

BAR -,-

AXA1432 AXA1440 AXA1434 AXA1439 AXA1435 AXA1441

B/51
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

safety stickers and their location

Located in the cab on the right hand side window


(fig.28/B):

- DANGER (1)
Keep all persons at a safe distance from the vehicle when
starting loading operations.

- DANGER (2)
(fig.28/B)
When carrying out maintenance work, block all hydraulic
cylinders using safety locks. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

- DANGER (3)
Keep all persons at a safe distance.

- DANGER (4)
Do not open or remove the safety panels while the engine is
running.

- DANGER (5)
Wait until all moving parts have come to a halt.

- DANGER (6)
Switch off the engine and remove the key before starting
maintenance work.

- DANGER (7)
Check the work zone and keep far away from power supplies.

On the engine compartment radiator(fig.29/B)

- DANGER (8)
Steam and hot water under high pressure. Protect the face.
Remove the cap with due caution.

On the side of the intercooler radiator (fig.30/B)


(fig.29/B) (fig.30/B)
- DANGER (9)
8 9 - 10
Risk of burns.

- DANGER (10)
Keep all persons at a safe distance.

On the side of the intercooler radiator (fig.31/B)

- DANGER (11)
Do not open or remove the safety panels while the engine is
running.

- DANGER (12)
Wait until all moving parts have come to a halt. (fig.31B) (fig.32/B)
11 - 12 13
On the side of the intercooler radiator (fig.32/B)

- DANGER (13)
Do not open; wait until all moving parts have come to a stop.

B/52
Stickers for use and maintenance

On the rear window (fig.34/B)


Indicates the direction of clip extraction hindering total ope-
ning of the window

On the rear window (fig.35/B) (fig.34/B) (fig.35/B)


Indicates the emergency exit

Under the steering wheel (fig.36/B) AXA 1492

Indicates the obligation to fasten seat-belts when using the vehicle. DEXTRON 2

On the side of the brake oil tank (fig.37/B)


Indicates the type of oil used in the brake system.
AXA 1506

(fig.36/B) (fig.37/B)
On the chassis (fig.38/B)

Shows the 4 places where the vehicle can be anchored if it


should need to be lifted.

Under the chassis (fig.39/B)

Shows the 4 places where the vehicle can be towed or an-


chored for transportation.
(fig.38/B) (fig.39/B)

On the parts not to be stepped on (fig.40/B)

- DANGER
Keep off "danger of breakage".

On the fuel tank (fig.41/B)


Type of fuel to be used.
(fig.40/B) (fig.41/B)

On the side of the hydraulic oil tank (fig.42/B)


Indicator for hydraulic oil level.

On the side of the hydraulic oil tank (fig.43/B)


Marks the cap to top up the hydraulic oil.

(fig.42/B) (fig.43/B)

Outside the engine bonnet (fig.44/B)

On the 4 fenders (fig.45/B)


Indicates the recommended tyre pressure. BAR 4,5

(fig.44/B) (fig.45/B)

B/53
Mod. Hercules Safety Regulations

On the accumulators (fig.46/B)

- DANGER:
Depressurise the hydraulic circuit before carrying out main-
tenance interventions.

(fig.46/B)

B/54
GETTING TO KNOW AND USING
THE VEHICLE

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/1
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

Any modification to the vehicle REQUIRES new


verification of conformity with the directive
98/37 “ “ this procedure is valid also in the event
of repair work completed using non original spare parts.

do not use unless this manual


has been carefully read and understood.

THE OPERATOR IS REQUIRED TO LEARN THE LOCATION AND FUNCTION OF


ALL THE INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS, INDEPENDENT OF HIS OR HER
EXPERIENCE IN THE FIELD, BEFORE OPERATING THE VEHICLE.

The images, descriptions, measurements contained in this


chapter refer to all standard vehicles.

Upon request, your vehicle can be fitted


with optional controls and attachments.

All functions AND procedures relevant to the operation and


the preparation of the vehicle that are not described in this
manual are strictly forbidden.

USE OF THE MACHINE FOR PURPOSES OTHER THAN THOSE DESCRIBED IN


THIS MANUAL IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.

Reading and understanding chapter “B”


(Safety regulations) is MANDATORY before reading
chapter “C” and using the vehicle.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/2
GENERAL WARNINGS - ATTENTION -
The vehicle should be used exclusively by competent, au-
- ATTENTION - thorized personnel who have thoroughly read this manual.
If the vehicle is to be used on public roads, the operator
The operator must utilise the vehicle and all its commands should be in possession of a valid, category B driver’s li-
only when properly seated in the driver’s seat. cence, or higher in accordance with Italian law.

- ATTENTION - - ATTENTION -
The telehandler described in the this manual cannot be Do not use the machine if you are under the effect of alco-
used in closed spaces or anywhere where there might be hol, drugs or if you have taken medication that may make
explosive gases. If this vehicle needs to be used in such you drowsy or alter your prompt reactions.
locations, the manufacturer should be contacted so that the
necessary modifications can be made to the vehicle.
- ATTENTION -
- ATTENTION - Before starting up the vehicle or before carrying out any par-
ticularly complicated or dangerous manoeuvres, it is essential
It may be dangerous to work on a gradient. The conditions that you practice in an empty, unobstructed part of the site.
of the terrain can vary according to climatic conditions (e.g.
rain, snow, ice). Careful attention must, therefore, be paid
to the conditions of the terrain on which the vehicle is being
- ATTENTION -
used and low speeds are recommended. Clear, simple symbols are located near each of the controls
to make them comprehensible to the operator.
- ATTENTION -
When transporting a load on a gradient, the load should be
- ATTENTION -
kept up gradient with respect to the vehicle in order to in- When choosing the diagonal steering, always proceed slowly.
crease stability. Before mounting ramps or trailers with the
vehicle, it is advisable to remove any mud, ice or oil which - ATTENTION -
might lead to accidents.
Should there be any damage to potentially hazardous parts,
stop the vehicle immediately. Do not resume work until the
- ATTENTION - malfunction has been repaired.
Proceed with due caution on loose, wet or muddy surfaces.
- ATTENTION -
- ATTENTION - Tyres which are over inflated or overheated may explode:
Lack of efficient or clear communication may cause serious to inflate your tyres correctly, follow the instructions given
accidents. If you are working with others, make sure any in this manual. Do not weld or cut the rims; any repair work
hand signals you intend to use are understood by every- should be carried out by specialised personnel.
body. Since work sites are often very noisy, do not rely on
verbal communication. - ATTENTION -
The vehicle boom should not be left lifted or extended for a
- ATTENTION - long time. This could cause displacement of boom exten-
Use of the vehicle’s moveable hydraulic parts to lift people, sions. Have extensions retract at least once a day.
with exception of the uses for which the vehicle has been
designed are strictly prohibited.
- ATTENTION -
- ATTENTION -
Before starting up moveable hydraulic parts of the vehicle, Reading and understanding
,make sure there is no one within range. chapter “B” (Safety regulations)
is mandatory before reading
chapter “C” and using the vehicle.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/3
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

IDENTIFYING THE VEHICLE PARTS

Left side of vehicle


10 1

2 11
7 9

5
3

4 4
8
6 12 6

1. Cab 7. Left front light


2. Telescopic boom 8. Fuel tank cap
3. Attachment holding plate 9. Left rear light
4. Epicyclic reduction gear 10. Front working light on cab
5. Machine levelling cylinder 11. Left rear view mirror
6. Tyre 12. Cab up/down steps

Right side of the vehicle


13 11

12
7
1 8
4
5 6 10
9
14
2 2

3 3

1. Right rear light 8. Right front light


2. Epicyclic reduction gear 9. Electric plug boom head
3. Tyre 10. Boom head working light
4. Engine bonnet 11. Front working light on cab
5. Diesel engines 12. Telescopic boom
6. Levelling cylinder 13. Cab
7. Right rear view mirror 14. Attachment holding plate

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/4
IDENTIFYING THE VEHICLE PARTS

Front view Rear view

6 5
8 8
9 6 7
4 5
7
3 4

1 3 2 1 2
1. Right front tyre 1. Left front tyre
2. Left front tyre 2. Right front tyre
3. Attachment holding plate 3. Left front light
4. Right front light 4. Right front light
5. Left front light 5. Cab
6. Cab 6. Telescopic boom
7. Telescopic boom 7. Right rear view mirror
8. Left rear view mirror 8. Left rear view mirror
9. Right rear view mirror

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/5
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

CAB

External Components

1. Openable roof. 8
2. Left rear view mirror.
3. Rear windscreen wipers.
4. Cab door.
2 1
5. Upper door window. 5
6. Door opening handle.
7. Rear windscreen / emergency exit. 3 7
8. Rear windscreen wiper.
9. Revolving light signal outlet.

6
9
4

Internal Components
1. Seat
2. Door opening handle.
3. Upper window opening handle.
12
4. Ashtray.
5. courtesy compartment 9 5
6. Document holder pocket
7. Vehicle identification plate. 10 11 3
8. Cab up/down handle. 1
9. Steering wheel.
8
10. Dashboard.
11. Joystick. 8
12. Cab interior lighting
4
2
8
7
6

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/6
THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/7
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

GETTING IN AND OUT OF THE CAB

Make sure that your hands and shoes are clean and dry
to prevent slipping and falling. Use the provided handles
(fig.1/C Pos.”1”, “2”, “3”) to climb into the cab. Do not use
controls or the internal steering wheel as supports. Always
face the driving cab when getting in or out of the vehicle.

(fig.1/C)

Door opening controls

The cab door is equipped with an external handle with lock


(fig.2/C Pos.”1”).

To open the door: 1


- Insert the key into the lock (fig.2/C Pos.”2”) and turn clock-
wise/counter-clockwise to engage/disengage the lock.
- Pull the handle towards you to unhook the door with the
lock disengaged.

NOTE:
The door will not open when the lock is engaged. 2 1
(fig.2/C)
- PROHIBITION -
OPERATING THE VEHICLE WITH THE CAB DOOR
OPEN IN STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
3
INTERNAL DOOR OPENING CONTROLS

- Move the handle upwards to open the door (fig. 2/C Pos. “3”).
- Push the door outwards to complete opening.

- ATTENTION
Before pushing the door out, check that
the area is free from obstacles.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/8
OPENING THE DOOR WINDOW
(fig.3/C Pos.”1”)

- To open, lower the handle, turning it clockwise (fig. 3/C


Pos. “2”).
- To lock the window in the open position, block it in the
stopper provided using light force (fig, 3/C Pos. “3”). 1
- From the inside of the cabin, press the button provided
(fig.3/C Pos.”4”) to unlock and close the window.
- To close the window, pull it toward you, bringing it back
3
to the starting position.
- Turn the hand grip clockwise to lock the window in the
closed position.

- ATTENTION
2
Before pushing the door outwards, ensure that the area is
free from obstacles.

- ATTENTION
4
Before starting to operate, make sure that the door window
is locked, whether it is in the open or closed position.

(fig.3/C)

REAR WINDOW
(fig.4/C Pos.”1” )

- To open, pull the handle (fig.4/C Pos.”2”) and push the


window outwards.
The window will remain in the open position by the handle itself.
1
EMERGENCY EXIT
(fig.4/C)

The emergency exit is identified and marked on the rear window.


- If it is necessary to open the window completely, slide out
the locking pin (fig.6 /C Pos.”3”) and push the window.
The pin should be kept in position as shown in the illustra-
tion during normal working operations.

- PROHIBITION 3
Opening the window completely during use of the vehicle IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED, due to possible shearing hazards
between the boom and chassis The rear windscreen is
found near the telescopic boom.
2
- ATTENTION
Take care when opening and/or removing windows as they
could chip or shatter, creating risk of injury to the operator
in the cab and to those in the surrounding area. Take proper (fig.4/C)
caution and use suitable accident prevention equipment
(goggles, gloves, helmet, etc.).

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/9
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

UPPER ROOF
(fig.5/C)

To open the roof, grip the handles (fig.5/C Pos.”1” and “2”)
and push up with a rotary motion (fig.5/C Pos.”A”). The rotated
handles will keep the window open. Do the opposite to close.

1 2
- ATTENTION
In the event that the handles should not keep the window in an
open position, replace them as soon as possible, risk of crushing.

(fig.5/C)
A

LIGHTING INSIDE THE CAB


(fig.6/C Pos.”1”)

- Push the button on the side of the lamp to switch on the light
- To switch off the lamp, do the opposite.

(fig.6/C)

ASHTRAY
(fig.7/C pos.”1”)

- To open, pull the upper side towards you.

(fig.7/C)

T OM
1

MAX POWER 180W 1


OM I

(fig.8/C Pos.”1”)
ACT MAX

1
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

- Power 12v 180w for direct current users


(battery chargers, cell phones, etc.).
MAX

- ATTENTION
180W

Do not connect users with nominal voltage exceeding 12


volt and input power exceeding 180W.
Danger of damage to the electrical system.
(fig.8/C)
ST OP

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/10
COURTESY COMPARTMENT
(fig.9/C Pos.”1”)
1
- Positioned behind seat

(fig.9/C)

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POCKET


(fig.100/C Pos.”1”)

Technical documents must be kept in the pocket located


on the internal side of the cab door (fig.10/C Pos.”1”).
The use and maintenance manual and the spare parts cata-
logue must always be available to the operator inside the
vehicle for quick reference.

- ATTENTION
The manual and the spare parts catalogue are an integral 1
parts of the vehicle and must always accompany it, even
when it is sold. The manual must be carefully kept aboard
the vehicle for a quick reference and it must be in the opera-
tor’s language. If the manual is creased, partially damaged
or is not easily legible, replace it immediately.
(fig.10/C)

STEERING WHEEL (adjustment)


(fig.11/C)

To adjust the steering wheel tilt:


- Turn lever “1” (fig.11/C) towards the front of the vehicle
to unlock movement.
- Push or pull the steering wheel to find the desired position.
- Turn handle “1” (fig.11/C) towards you to lock the steer-
ing wheel in the desired position. Screw in with force to
lock completely.

Pull lever “1” (fig.11/C1) to the left and turn it if when in the
locked position, its position that disturbs operation.

- ATTENTION
The steering wheel has been correctly adjusted when the
operator, with his/her back resting against the seat back, is
able to reach of the furthest part of the steering wheel with
his/her elbows slightly bent. 1

(fig.11/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/11
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

SEAT
(fig.12/C)

DIECI supplies different seat models depending on client


requirements. The vehicle is equipped with a safety system
called “man in” which uses an electric power microswitch in
the driver’s seat. This microswitch is positioned inside the
seat cushion (fig.12/C Pos.”A”).

The engine can be started only if the operator is seated A


properly in the driver’s seat and the forward/reverse lever is
in the “N” neutral position.

Seat adjustment
(fig.13/C)

The seat can be adjusted to different positions:


A - Longitudinal positioning of the group (fig.13/C).
B - Longitudinal positioning of the seat (fig.13/C).
C - Seat cushion inclination (fig. 13/C)
D - Longitudinal sitting position (fig.13/C). (fig.12/C)
E - Spring rate adjustment (fig.13/C).
F - Backrest inclination adjustment (fig.14/C).
G - Back cushion adjustment (fig.14/C).
H - Armrest positioning (fig.14/C).
D
The seat is mounted on a longitudinally sliding unit that can C
advance or retract with the arm control levers. The operator
can choose the most comfortable position based on his/ build.

- To longitudinally adjust the command unit, use the “A”


lever (fig. 13/C) by sliding the unit along the runners.
Release the lever when the desired position has been
established. Move slightly in order to make sure that the
locking pin is correctly housed in its lock slot.
B
- To longitudinally adjust the seat, use lever “B” lever (fig.
13/C) and slide the unit along the runners. A
Release the lever when the desired position has been
established. Move slightly in order to make sure that the
locking pin is correctly housed in its lock slot.

- To incline the seat cushion use handle “C” (fig. 13/C)


and force the front part of the cushion.
E F
- To change the seat cushion position use handle “D” (fig.
13/C) and slide the cushion along the runners. Release (fig.13/C)
the lever when the desired position has been estab-
lished. Move slightly in order to make sure that the lock-
ing pin is correctly housed in its lock slot.

- To adjust the spring rate, turn lever “E” (fig. 13/C).


Check adjustment on transparent band “F” (fig. 13/C). Ideal
adjustment is obtained when the weight indicated on the
transparent band corresponds with the weight of the operator.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/12
- To adjust the backrest inclination, move lever “F
”(fig.14/C) and push back on the backrest. The backrest
will automatically adapt to the operator’s body.
- To adjust the back cushion, use the “G” handgrip (fig.
14/C) behind the backrest.
- To adjust the arm rests, turn the “I” handle (fig. 14/C).
To fully raise or lower armrests completely turn the arm I
rest using in a circular motion ”H” (fig.14/C).

- ATTENTION
The seat has been correctly positioned when the operator is
H
able to push the brake pedal completely to the end with the
back firmly against the backrest.
H
I

SEAT BELTS F (fig.14/C)


(fig.15/C)

In order to fasten your seat-belts you should:


1. Slide the tab (1) into the buckle (2) (pic.”A”).
1
2. Make sure this has been clicked in properly, then fit the
2
belt around your body and adjust (pic.”B”).

- ATTENTION “A”
The belt has been correctly adjusted when it fits tightly
around the waist.

To unfasten your seat-belt: (”C”):


1. Press the red button (3) on the buckle (2).
2. Slide the tab out (1).

- ATTENTION “B”
The vehicle should only be operated when the seat belt
is correctly fastened and adjusted. Operating the vehicle
without the seat belt fastened increases the risk of accident.

1
- ATTENTION 2

Do not use damaged or warn seat belts.


Do not use seat belts installed on vehicles that have suf-
fered from accidents. If worn, damaged or weak the seat “C”
belts can break or give in case of collision causing serious
injuries to the operator. 3

(fig.15/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/13
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

INTERIOR CAB INSTRUMENTS


(fig.16/C)

16 11
1 T

1
1
OM

OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

12 MAX
180W

2 3
10 13
STOP

15
4 3
2

14

5
9

6 7
8

(fig.16/C)
1. Dashboard with air-vents 9. Steering wheel.
2. Adjustable steering shaft 10. Ignition key
3. Right dashboard 11. Load monitoring display
4. Steering wheel adjustment lever 12. Left dashboard
5. Boom movements joystick 13. Proper levelling
6. “INCHING” pedal 14. Gear lever
7. Brake pedal 15. Multi-function lever
8. Accelerator pedal 16. Central dashboard

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/14
CENTRAL DASHBOARD PILOT LIGHTS
(fig.17/C)

(fig.17/C)
Full beam headlights pilot light Front axle alignment pilot light
(blue) (yellow)

Direction indicators pilot lights Back axle alignment pilot light


(green) (yellow)

Sparkles pre-heating pilot light


Not used
(yellow)

Air filter obstructed pilot light


Not used
(red)

Hydraulic oil filter pilot light


(red) Not used

Engine oil pressure pilot light


Not used
(red)

Generator pilot light Damage to braking system pilot light


(red) (red)

Insufficient pressure in parking brake


High hydraulic oil temperature pilot light
accumulator pilot light
(red)
(red)
Parking brake pilot light
(red) Fuel level indicator instrument

General alarm pilot light


Water temperature indicator
(red)

Mechanical gear engaged pilot light Forward warning light


A (green) (green)

Fast speed engaged pilot light Reverse pilot light


2 (green) (green)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/15
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

CENTRAL DASHBOARD - INSTRUMENT USE


(fig.18/C)

(fig.18/C)

Fuel level indicator instrument Engine water temperature instrument

The instrument pointer indicates the quantity of diesel During normal use, the temperature pointer moves from
present in the tank in that moment. Maximum quantity is the lower part of the instrument (min), stopping after having
indicated by the positioning of the hand on the letter “F”. The reached the first fourth of the scale. This is the ideal condi-
pointer will move down progressively, passing through a red tion for engine operation. If the temperature should rise ex-
mark that indicates the minimum level (reserve), also indi- cessively, almost to maximum level (Max), stop the engine
cated by the same yellow pilot light. If the pointer is on the and verify the cause. When the red pilot light switches on,
letter “E”, the fuel tank is empty. To avoid damage, keep the the maximum temperature alarm is signaled. To avoid dam-
pointer about the minimum level. aging a cold engine, operate at low speed (max 1500) until
the water has reached the desired temperature.

Engine speed indicator LCD Display

This instrument indicates the number of RPMs the engine is


carrying out in that moment. The LCD display contains a clock, an hour counting instru-
Always maintain control over RPMs and engine speed. ment with that shows the hours of operation, the traction
When 2350 rpm has been reached, the dashboard will status, indicated by the letter “N” if the vehicle is in neutral
sound a continuous acoustic alarm that the engine is (gear shift lever in neutral), tachometer (optional), odometer
revving and the “general alarm” pilot light will light up (optional), motor errors, service required.
on the central dashboard.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/16
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD (FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCHES)
(fig.19/C)

2 3

(fig.19/C)

Parking brake switch


Internal cab ventilation selector
(red)

Revolving light switch “I” gear switch


(yellow) I (red)

Front squeegee switch “II” gear switch


(green) II (red)

Rear windscreen wiper


Emergency lights switch
(with spray windscreen washer) switch
(red)
(green)

Cab front working light switch Anti tipping device switch


(green) Optional (red)

Cab rear working light switch Air Conditioner Switch


(green) Optional (green) Optional

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/17
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD (FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCHES)


(fig.20/C)

T OM
1
1
OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

2 3 5

4 MAX
180W

6 7

STOP

10
14 H ERCULES160.
3 PrELImINAr
E
PrELImINArE

11 10 60° E
9.9
9.9
10 60˚ D E
9
50° C D
9
b C
8 50˚
A b
8
7 40° A

12
7 40˚
6 16000 kg
6 30°
5 16000 kg
30˚
5
4
20°
4
20˚
3
9500

3
9500

2 10°

9
00
00

2 10˚
0 0
6200
5000
4200

420760
500120
140

1
0
12000
7600
0
0

1400
0

1
62


0 0

0
0
-1 2 1
3
5 -1 4
3 2 1
m 5 4
m

13
10
(fig.20/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/18
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD – SWITCHES, SELECTORS AND BUTTONS

1 Anti tipping device – 3B6 9 Vehicle levelling switch

2 Not used 10 Manual electronic accelerator

Vehicle functions selector


3 from vehicle or by remote 11 Load charts

Boom head solenoid valve switch


4 Type of steering selector 12 Optional

Boom head working light switch


5 MAX Supplementary electrical plug 13 Optional
180 W

Accessory quick
6 Vehicle ignition key 14 attachment consent from cab
Optional

EMERGENCY BUTTON
7 Hydraulic system and engine switch-off

8 Level

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/19
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

IGNITION SWITCH
(fig.21/C Pos.”A”) (fig.22/C)
T OM
1
1

The ignition switch, with the key, allows you to:


OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

- Switch on the diesel engine. MAX


180W
A
- Switch on the instruments. 2 3

- Disengage the parking brake automatically with diesel STOP

engine in movement
- Automatic engagement of parking brake with the diesel
engine switched off (fig.22/C Pos.”0”).

Conditions for start-up

Start-up can be carried out only if:


- The operator is correctly seated in the driver’s seat.
- The gear selector is in the “N”, or neutral, position.

Switching on instruments
(fig.21/C)
Turn the key to position “1” (fig.22/C) to send an electrical cur-
rent to the electrical/electronic instruments and the dashboard.
When the dashboard is switched on, a general inspection of 0
all instrumentation with be carried out and all pilot lights will 1
remain switched on for about 5 seconds.

These will remain on until the engine is switched on: 2


- Battery pilot light
- Engine oil pressure pilot light
Other pilot lights may remain on depending on which
functions have been activated.

Should any pilot lights remain switched on signalling mal-


functions, do not switch on the vehicle, consult the “mainte-
nance” chapter of this manual and contact a DIECI author-
ized service centre.

The first acoustic warning signal indicates dashboard start-


up with its related function” “check””. A second acoustic sig-
nal indicates load control panel start-up. Ensure that on the
central dashboard LCD display that the letter “N”, for neutral
gear, appears. Ensure that the parking brake is engaged (fig.22/C)
by checking that its pilot light is switched on. If it is not en-
gaged, engage it before starting the vehicle.

Start-up

- Turn the key to position “1” (fig.22/C) to power the instruments.


- Wait for dashboard pilot lights to switch off
- Turn the key to position “2” (fig.22/C) and keep it there
for a few seconds in order to carry out start-up.
- Once the engine has started, release the key.

In the event that start-up cannot be carried out in a period of


5 seconds, try again at regular intervals of 15 seconds to not
overload the starting motor.
If the engine will not start, consult the “maintenance” chapter
of this manual and contact a DIECI service centre.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/20
- ATTENTION
The automatically engaging service brake will disengage
with the engine started up. Before starting up the vehicle,
always verify that the parking brake has been manually en-
gaged via its switch.

- ATTENTION
To release the parking brake with the engine stopped, refer
to the paragraph, “towing the vehicle” .

When the brake is engaged, the hydrostatic transmission


remains locked and the vehicle cannot move.

When the engine has started up, the pilot lights signalling
faults/malfunctions should go off and only those regarding
active functions should remain on. If the engine will not start,
consult the “maintenance” chapter of this manual and con-
tact a DIECI service centre.

During the first few minutes of use, keep transfer and load
lifting speed low in order to heat up the engine and hydraulic
oil. Before using the vehicle when it is fully loaded, wait for
the engine water to heat up.

- ATTENTION
Bring the engine to a high number of RPMs before high tem-
perature and pressure can cause any serious damge to the
engine or the hydraulic system.

Always maintain control over RPMs and engine speed.


Once 2350rmp has been reached the dashboard will
indicate that the engine is revving via a continuous
acoustic signal and the “general alarm” pilot light on
the central dashboard will switch on.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/21
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

T OM
1
1
OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

DASHBOARD LEVERS MAX


180W

Forward / reverse gear selection levers 2 3

STOP

This lever “1” (fig.23/C) allows you to change direction and


use the horn. On the dashboard, pilot lights indicate the di-
rection in which the vehicle is moving (fig. 24/C pos. “F-R”).
If the pilot lights are switched off the vehicle is in neutral and
on the LCD display the letter “N” appears (fig 24/C position
N) If the lever is kept in the middle position, the transmission
is in neutral and the vehicle is partially stopped.

The rotary function of the lever is not active in these models.

- ATTENTION
in order to engage the FORWARD/ REVERSE gear, move
the lever upwards. This movement protects the lever from
accidental manoeuvres.

F
- If the lever is moved in direction “F” (fig. 23/C), the FORWARD
gear is engaged and pilot light “F” (fig.24/ C) switches on.
- If the lever is moved in direction “R” (fig. 23/C), the
REVERSE gear is engaged and pilot light “R” (fig.24/ 1
C) switches on. When the reverse gear is engaged, an
acoustic alarm will be set off.
F
- Pushing down on end of the lever activates the horn
(fig.23/C pos.”2”)
N
- ATTENTION -
The lever movements are not active when:
2 R
- The parking brake is engaged.

R
- The operator is not correctly seated in the driver’s seat.
- The basket is mounted on the vehicle, the basket elec-
tric plug is inserted into the boom head and the “vehicle
functions” selector is in the position “basket”.
- The vehicle’s basket is raised off the groun and/or the (fig.23/C)
boom partially lifted.

The manual electronic accelerator is active.


F R
Procedure for changing direction:

- Reduce engine speed to a minimum.


- Select the new direction.

- ATTENTION
Moving the forward/reverse gear selector lever when the
engine is revving is dangerous as the vehicle, abruptly N
changes direction.
(fig.24/C)
If the speed control lever forward/reverse is positioned
on a selection other than neutral, with the parking brake
engaged,the hydrostatic transmission will not be activated.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/22
T OM
1
1
OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER MAX


180W

Direction indicators 2 3

STOP

- Pull the lever towards you to signal a diversion to the


right (fig.25/C Pos.”R”).
- Push it forward to signal a curve to the left (fig. 25/C Pos.”L”).

The indicators only work if the ignition switch is in the “on”


position (fig.22/C Pos.”1”).
A pilot light on the central dashboard signals the activation
of the direction indicators.

L
Function buttons

- The middle button on the handle activates the front


windscreen (fig.25/C Pos.”2”). 1 2
- The button located at the end of the handle activates the
clacson (fig.25/C Pos.”3”).

R
(fig.25/C)
Switching on headlight

Rotating the knob to“1” (fig. 26/C) switches on the headlights.


The symbols on the knob indicates, with an arrow, that the
lights are (fig.26/C Pos. “D”):
D
- Switched off (fig.26/C Pos.”A”). 1
- Position (fig.26/C Pos.”B”). C
- Dipped lights (fig.26/C Pos.”C”).

The full beam headlights (fig.26/C Pos.”E”) are activated by B


shifting the lever upwards for single flashes, downward for
continuous use.
A
E

(fig.26/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/23
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

PEDALS

Accelerator pedal
(fig.2/C Pos.”1”).
1
Press down the accelerator pedal to increase engine RPMs
3 2
and release it to decrease RPMs. The pedal acts directly
on the engine injection pump. When the engine is at a mini-
mum, the vehicle remains partially braked.

Service brake pedal


(fig.27/C Pos.”2”).
(fig.27/C)
Press the service pedal to slow down or stop the vehicle.
The pedal acts directly on the service brakes inside the dif-
ferential axles.

When the brake pedal is pushed, the rear stop lights are switched
on. The lights remain switched on until the pedal is released.

Periodically check that both lights are working.

- ATTENTION
In the event of limited use of the pedal, periodically check
that it is working properly. Contact a DIECI service centre in
the event of a problem.

“INCHING” pedal
(fig.27/C Pos.”3”).

The pedal allows for slow, precise moving even when the
engine is at a high RPM. It acts directly on the hydrostatic
pump, reducing capacity.
The vehicle stops, remaining partially braked, when the
pedal is completely pressed.

- ATTENTION
Do not press the pedal at high speeds, the vehicle will
brake abruptly.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/24
PARKING BRAKE

The parking brake must be engaged whenever the operator


leaves the vehicle, whether the engine be switched off or
switched on, in the event of even momentary stops, and any
time the vehicle is operating while stopped. The brake is au-
tomatically engaged when the engine is switched off.

When switch “A” (fig.28/C) is pressed, the parking brake


2 3
is engaged. The pilot warning light on the push button and
the central dashboard (fig.29/C Pos.”2”) indicates that en-
gagement has been set properly. When the parking brake
is engaged, the vehicle cannot move and the hydrostatic
transmission is disengaged.

Check the operation of the parking brake as follows:


1. Get in the vehicle, fasten your seat belt.
2. Start up the engine.
3. Park the vehicle on a flat and dry surface.
4. Engage the parking brake (fig. 28/C Pos.”A”). A
5. Raise the tools until they are in the position to be transferred.
6. Engage the slow speed.
(fig.28/C)
7. Engage the forward gear switch.
8. If the vehicle does not move, press down the accelera-
tor to gradually increase the rotation speed up to 1500
r.p.m. The vehicle must not move.
9. The test should not last for more than 20 seconds.
10. If during the test, the vehicle has not moved have the
1 2
brake checked at a DIECI service centre.

- ATTENTION
In case the parking brake breaks down do not use the vehicle.

- ATTENTION
Unauthorised modifications of the rear axle ratios, machine
weight, that is, wheel and tyres dimensions, may hinder
parking brake efficiency.

- ATTENTION -
Before checking the parking brake (fig.29/C)
make sure that there are no
people around the vehicle.

If the pilot light “1” switches on (fig. 29/C) consult the chapter
“Maintenance” in this manual.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/25
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

FAST/SLOW SPEED COMMAND


(fig.30/C Pos.”A” and “B”)

The vehicle has a 2-speed mechanical gear shift (fast/slow


gears) for use in work sites or for transfer on public roads.

To change gears:
- Slow down and bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2 3
- Push down the “inching” pedal and that of the brake.
- Hold down the switch in the “A” position for a few sec-
onds (fig. 30/C) and insert the slow “I” gear; the gear is
inserted properly when pilot light “2” (fig.31/C) on the
dashboard switches off.
A
- Hold down the switch in the “B” position for a few sec-
onds (fig. 30/C) and insert the fast “II” gear; the gear is
inserted properly when pilot light (fig.31/C, pos. 2) on
the dashboard switches off.

- ATTENTION
Pilot light “1” (fig. 31/c) on the central dashboard always B
remains on when the mechanical gear is inserted. The shift
from slow “I” to fast “II” is indicated by the switching on of
(fig.30/C)
pilot light “2” (fig. 31/C).

- ATTENTION
The fast gear “II” can only be used for on road transfer and
not in work sites. 1 2

- ATTENTION -
Do not change gears
when the vehicle is in motion

(fig.31/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/26
T OM
1
1
OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

EMERGENCY BUTTON
(fig.32/C Pos.”1”)

The emergency button allows for the motor to be switched


off and the boom movements to be stopped. MAX
180W

- Push down the head of the push-button to activate it.


- Rotate in the direction of the arrow on the head of the
button to disactivate it
1 2
- ATTENTION STOP

The button should be used with the boom operating systems


are out of control or in any other emergency situation.

PROPER LEVELLING
(fig.32/C Pos.”2”)
(fig.32/C)
Located to the right of the operator and used to check the
proper vehicle levelling and balance.

- ATTENTION
For safe operation, the vehicle must be level; the maximum
slope allowed is 2°.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/27
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

LEVELLING OF DIFFERENTIAL AXLES FRONT


(fig.33/C Pos.”1”)

The vehicle must always be level in order to be operated; if


it is not level loads may fall and the vehicle may overturn.
Using the front differential axle level, the vehicle can be 1 1
aligned with the horizontal working ground.
Always check the proper levelling of the vehicle (fig.34/C
Pos.“2“).

The correct sequence for level use is as follows:


1. Place load on the ground. T OM
1
2. Lower and completely retract the boom. 1
OM I
ACT MAX

3. Level the vehicle using the switch.


SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

- Press the selector on the “A” part


to level the vehicle to the left (fig. 34/C)
- Press the selector on the “B” part (fig.33/C)
to level the vehicle to the right (fig. 34/C) MAX
180W

- ATTENTION
For safe operation, the vehicle must be level; the maximum
slope allowed is 2°.
2
Once the vehicle has been levelled, continue to regularly verify STOP

correct levelling using the spirit level in the cab (fig.34/C Pos.“2“).

- ATTENTION
The Levelling of the differential axle is inhibited if the tele-
scopic boom is lifted with angle greater than 15° compared
to the horizontal boom position.

(fig.34/C)

A B

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/28
manipulator
T OM

Electro-hydraulic proportional servo control


1
1
OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

with manipulator MAX

(fig.51/C Pos.”1”)
180W

2
2 3

STOP

The telehandler is equipped with a electro-hydraulic servo


control located to the right of the operator (fig.51/C Pos.”1”).
The servo control activates:
Raising/lowering of the boom
Swivelling of the forks
1
Retraction/extension of the telescopic boom
Services
The joysticks are protected by a “man in” safety system that
allows movements only if the rear grip of the manipulator
(fig.52/C Pos.“6”) is held down throughout the entire operation
In this way, unintended actions by the operator are avoided. (fig.51/C)

- To lift the load (fig.52/C Pos.“3”), pull back manipulator “C”


(fig.52/C).
- To lower the load (fig.52/C Pos.“3”), push forward manipulator 2 1
“C” (fig.52/C).
- To swivel the fork downwards (fig.52/C Pos.”4”) move ma-
nipulator “C” (fig.52/C) to the right.
- To swivel the fork downwards (fig.52/C Pos.”4”) move the ma-
nipulator (fig.52/C Pos. “C”) to the left.
3 AA B
b

- To extend the telescopic boom (fig.52/C Pos.”2”), rotate the


“A” roller (fig.52/C) towards the front of the vehicle.
- To extend the telescopic boom (fig.52/C Pos.”2”), rotate the
“A” roller (fig.52/C) towards you.
C
- To control the boom head supplementary instruments (ex.
transfer plate fig.52/C Pos.“5”), rotate the “B” roller (fig.52/C) 4
towards the front or the back of the vehicle depending on the
movement to be carried out.

NOTE: When an electro hydraulic attachment is installed, roller


“B” (fig.52/C) is used to control service movements in accordance
with that specified in the manual provided with the attachment.
5 6
- ATTENTION
Before operating the machine, verify the function and move-
ments of roller “B” (fig.52/C). Work in an area free of obsta-
cles that allows the verification of movements without risk of
damaging things, people or animals.

Operations may be carried out simultaneously by moving


the manipulator along the diagonals and activating rollers “A
and B” (fig. 52/C).
(fig.52/C)
- ATTENTION -
In the event of an emergency
press the emergency push-button (fig.51/C Pos.”2”),
the manipulator is disengaged.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/29
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE

The machine is provided with an electronic anti-tipping de-


vice (fig.55/C Pos.“A”) having the aim of helping the opera- B
tor to safely use the machine warning with visual and acous- T OM

tic signals of the nearing to the danger area, according to


1
1

the load tables. A 2


3
4
SEL
ACT
L
MAX
A
R
H
OM

SEL
I

5
ENTER INDEX

Before starting to work the device must be set for the equip-
ment mounted on the boom. The degree of stability of the mean
is signalled on the cab display. The asterisks present on the LCD MAX

“B” bar (fig.55/C), increase according to percentage compared to


180W

the maximum load.


The same signal is displayed by indicator lights “A” (fig.55/C):
Green Zone > no acoustic signal;
normal work condition (Green indicator light). STOP

Yellow Zone Start > intermittent acoustic signal; (fig.55/C)


pre-alarm condition, 90% maximum load (Yellow Indicator light).

Red Zone Start > continuous acoustic alarm;


- ATTENTION
100% maximum load, overturning limit (Red Indicator light). The anti-tipping device may be subject to malfunctioning
Upon reaching of the limit load, the device blocks machine and defects as it is an electronic apparatus with a number
movements considered hazardous. of different sensors. The operator must know how to identify
The alarm re-enter when the safety conditions are restored. problems and solve them as quickly as possible, contacting
an authorized DIECI repair or assistance center.
In case of alarm during use of the hook, hoists or winch
only the boom retract movements, swivel and services - ATTENTION -
of the rope descent side are maintained active.
The operator is responsible for the manual selection of
In case of alarm during use of the forks, only the boom the load tables and the limiter. The last load table used is
retract, boom ascent, services, plate swivel movements automatically selected when the vehicle is switched on.
are maintained active.
In case of alarm during use of the basket, only the boom - ATTENTION -
retract, boom ascent, services are maintained active. If the attachment is set incorrectly it may
cause improper functioning of the device and;
The anti-tipping device is always active. therefore, create a dangerous situation.

- ATTENTION - ATTENTION -
However, this device should not substitute the experience of The table selected is saved even after the vehicle
the operator who is responsible for safely operating the vehi- has been switched off and switched on again,
cle and comply with all the regulations regarding its operation. until a new table is manually selected.

- ATTENTION - ATTENTION -
The operator must be able to detect if the data given by the in- The anti-tipping device must always be correctly set
strument are correct and correspond to reality. The data should for the use of equipment mounted on the boom head.
be used to safely operate the vehicle. When load weight is The boom cannot be moved or operated using
checked, make sure that the load is raised off the ground. an accessory different from that set on the device.
When switched on, the device runs a self-diagnostic program
to verify its proper operation and that of the transducers.
If the device is not working properly, it blocks all operations. - ATTENTION -
BEFORE USING, THE OPERATOR MUST
Before using, the operator must ensure that the instruments READ AND FULLY UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL
is working properly: OF THE ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE THAT HAS BEEN
- Verify the values indicated on the display. ADDED TO THIS MANUAL
- Check to see if there are any messages or alarms on the
control panel.
- Ensure that the operation block device is working properly.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/30
VERIFICATION OF ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE

- ATTENTION - B
T OM

IT IS COMPULSORY TO CHECK THE CORRECT


1
1

FUNCTIONING OF THE ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE A 2


3
4
SEL
ACT
L
MAX
A
R
H
OM

SEL
I

BEFORE EVERY WORK RE-START.


5
ENTER INDEX

For correct verification of the device following the operations below:


MAX
180W

-- Place the machine on horizontal and stable surface and


activate the parking brake.
-- Ensure the equipment is correctly assembled on the machine
and is adequate for the capacity of the same.
-- Verify the overturning device display is set for the assembled
STOP

equipment.
(fig.58/C)
-- Verify that the hydraulic system oil is at about 50°C - 60 °C.
-- Refer to the capacity diagram of the assembled equipment
and with boom closed take a load equal to about 50% of the
maximum equipment capacity.
-- Lift the load at about 50cm from the ground.
-- With the engine revs to a minimum, slowly extend the
boom.
-- During this manoeuvre monitor the display of the overturning
device (Fig. 58, pos.B). Once the red zone is reached, the
continuous acoustic signal must switch-on and the extension
movement will be simultaneously blocked.
-- Now check the hazardous movements envisioned for the
assembled equipment are not allowed.
-- Check block happens in the point indicated in the capacity
diagram present in the note pad inside the cab.
-- Should everything work correctly, start work.

- DANGER -
IN CASE OF ANOMALIES
OF THE SAFETY DEVICES,
INTERRUPT WORK UNTIL REPAIRED.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/31
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

DISCONNECTION OF LIMITING DEVICE

The safeties may be excluded by pushing and holding down


the button “A” (fig. 59/C) simultaneously with the joystick
movements. An acoustic signal inside the cab will sound
until the safeties have been re-activated. Disconnection of
the anti-tipping system remains active for 10 seconds after
which the disconnection of the system is deactivated and
movements are blocked again. If necessary to continue
2 3
operating the vehicle with the anti-tipping system discon-
nected, press the button “A” again (fig. 59/C).
“ALARM 15” appears on display “1” (fig. 60/C) when button
“A” is pressed (fig. 59/C)

- ATTENTION -
If the safeties are disconnected,
do not carry out manoeuvres that.
Put the stability of the vehicle at risk.
Risk of overturning.

- ATTENTION -
A
DIECI declines all liability in cases in which
the operator voluntarily or involuntarily uses
the button “A” incorrectly (fig.59/C) (fig.59/C)
to disconnect safeties.

- ATTENTION -
1
IF BUTTON “A” IS PUSHED (fig. 59/C) AND MANOEU-
T
VRES PEJORATIVE TO THE STABILITY OF THE VEHICLE
OM
1
1

ARE CARRIED OUT, THE VEHICLE MAY OVERTURN.


OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

- ATTENTION
In normal operating conditions, the button should not be
used. Use is only permitted after the anti-tipping system has MAX
180W

signalled a block.

- PROHIBITION -
Using the release button for operation with loads that exceed
(fig.60/C) STOP
those established by the manufacturer is PROHIBITED.
The button should only be used in extreme cases, when
malfunctioning occurs or in any situation justifying its use.
ONLY authorized, qualified personnel can use it.

- PROHIBITION -
THE ANTI-TIPPING EXCLUSION BUTTON MUST NOT BE
USED IF IT IS MOUNTED ON A HOOK ATTACHMENT
(HOOK FOR FORK PLATE, HOIST OR WINCH)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/32
RADIO CONTROL (optional)
(fig.61/C pos.”1”)
T OM

The vehicle if preset, allows the telescopic boom to be oper- 1


1

ated by remote Radio control allows the boom to be control-


OM I
ACT MAX
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3

led from a distance.


4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

The movements that can be carried out via radio control re- 1
mote are as follows: MAX
180W

Retraction/extension of the telescopic boom


Raising/lowering telescopic boom.
Swiveling
Services (fig.61/C) STOP

To activate the radio-control,


- Place load on the ground.
- Mount the tool on the boom head, if not already mounted.
- Level out the vehicle.
- Rotate selector “1” (fig. 61/C) in the counterclockwise di-
rection, bringing it to the “A” position (fig. 62/C) with the
antenna symbol
After selecting the radio control, the instrument used must
always be selected.
The selector allows the works manager the possibility of
removing the key after having selected the attachment, not
allowing anyone else to change the selection.

- ATTENTION
With selector in “radiocontrol” position (fig.62/C Pos. “A”), the
controls in cab are deactivated and the radiocontrol comman-
ds are enabled.

- ATTENTION
B
The emergency button in cab (fig.61/C Pos. “2”) is always
active with selector switch in “radiocontrol” position (fig.62/C
Pos. “A”). A
(fig.62/C)
- ATTENTION
Keep at a safe distance from the vehicle and load, in case
the vehicle overturns and the load is dropped.

Before using the radio control to operate the vehicle, care-


fully read the use and maintenance instructions provided by
the manufacturer together with those of the vehicle.

Radio control receiver


(fig.63/C pos.”1”)

The radio control receiver is installed in the back part of the


vehicle. When the radio control is selected the receiver is
1
activated. For specific operative functions carefully read the
user’s manual provided by the radio control manufacturer.

(fig.63/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/33
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

Steering selector
(fig.66/C Pos.”1”)

Turning the selector (fig.66/C Pos.”1”) 3 types of steering


T OM
1
1

are obtained: 2
SEL
ACT
L
MAX
A
R
H
OM I

3
3
4
5 SEL

1 - Normal steering - (fig.68/C Pos.”A”)


ENTER INDEX

This type of steering allows for front steering only.


To activate front steering, turn selector “1” (fig.67/C) to posi-
tion “A” (fig.67/C) shown on the steering functions sticker. 1
MAX
180W

2 - Radial steering - (fig.68/C Pos.”B”)


This type of steering allows for maximum right and left
steering.
To activate radial steering, turn selector “1” (fig.67/C) to po- (fig.66/C) STOP

sition “B” (fig.67/C) shown on the steering functions sticker.

3 - Crab steering - (fig.68/C Pos.”C”) 2


This type of steering allows for a crab-like steering on front
and rear parallel wheels (lateral movement of the vehicle)
To activate crab steering, turn selector “1” (fig.67/C) to posi-
tion “C” (fig.67/C) shown on the steering functions sticker.

- ATTENTION - 1
Steering selection is to be carried out
with the machine at a halt.

- ATTENTION
When driving on the road, position the steering control lever
A C
on Pos. “B” (fig.67/C), blocked with the special pin (fig.67/C B
Pos.”2”) (4-wheel steering mode).
(fig.67/C)
- ATTENTION
Before selecting a new type of steering, align wheels follow-
ing the procedure described below. Wheel alignment must
be carried out when the vehicle is stopped.

Alignment (standard)

1. Position selector “1” (fig.67/C) in the position marked


with “B” (fig.67/C) on the steering functions sticker.
2. Turn the steering wheel, observing the rear wheels until
they have been completely straightened.
3. Position selector “1” (fig.67/C) in the position marked
with “A” (fig.67/C) on the steering functions sticker.
4. Turn the steering wheel, observing the front wheels until
they have been completely straightened.
5. At this point, the front and rear wheels are aligned and
the desired steering type can be selected.

- ATTENTION
We recommend periodically carrying out wheel alignment
(every 8-10 hours) depending on the use of the vehicle.

(fig.68/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/34
Automatic wheels alignment
(Optional only 120.10)

To align the front wheels:

- Press button A (fig.68a/C) The two indicator lights


(fig.68b Pos.”1” and “2”) will start flashing.

- Turn the steering wheel in a way to align the rear wheels


2 3
to the machine. Once the rear wheels are aligned, indi-
cator light 2 (fig.105/C) will switch-on permanently and
the steering mode will be automatically modified to the
two front wheels only.

- Turn the steering wheel in a way to align the front whe-


els to the machine. When the front wheels are also alig-
ned, indicator light 1 will also switch-on (fig.105/C). Both
will remain on for a few seconds and will then switch-off
and the steering mode will return to the original.

At any moment it is possible to cancel the automatic align-


ment operation, by pressing the button again.
A
- ATTENTION -
(fig.68a/C)
This function can be used
when the steering mode
is on “concentric” or “crab”.

1 2

(fig.68b/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/35
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

REVOLVING LIGHT SWITCH

The revolving light must always be positioned above the


1
driver’s cab (fig.69/C Pos. “1”) and must always be in opera-
tion both at the work site and when driving on roads.

- Position the revolving light on the driver’s cab (fig.69/C


Pos.”1”).
2
- Insert the power plug in the socket at the rear of the cab
(fig.69/C Pos.”2”).
- To switch on the revolving light push the button ”A”
(fig.70/C) . The pilot light on the same switch lights up
indicating start-up.

(fig.69/C)

front lights SWITCH (OPTIONAL)


(fig.70/C Pos.”B”)

Use the switch (fig.70/C Pos.”A”) to turn on the cab front


working lights (fig.71/C Pos.”1”). The pilot light switches on
to indicate successful activation.

A 2 3
B C

Cab rear lights SWITCH


(OPTIONAL)
(fig.70/C Pos.”C”)

Use the switch (fig.70/C Pos.”C”) to turn on the rear work


lights on the cab (fig.71/C Pos.”2”). The pilot light switches
on to indicate successful activation.

(fig.70/C)

2
1

(fig.71/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/36
FRONT WINDSCREEN WIPER CONTROLS
(fig.72/C pos.”1”)

- Use the selector to activate (fig.72/C Pos.”1”).


- The first click inserts the first speed (slow)
- The second click inserts the second speed (fast).
The selector pilot light switches on to indicate successful 2 3
activation.
1 2
- ATTENTION
Worn blades may obstruct vision and scratch the glass.

REAR WINDSCREEN WIPER CONTROLS


(fig.72/C pos.”2”)

- Use the selector to activate (fig.72/C Pos.”2”).


- The first click inserts the rear windscreen.
- Press and hold the selector to activate rear windscreen wipers.
The selector pilot light switches on to indicate successful 3
activation.

- ATTENTION
(fig.72/C)
Worn blades may obstruct vision and scratch the glass.
T OM
1
1

EMERGENCY LIGHTS SELECTOR ACT MAX


OM I

(fig.72/C pos.”3”)
SEL R
2 L A H
3
3
4
5 SEL
ENTER INDEX

Use the selector (fig.72/C Pos.”3”) to activate emergency


lights (direction indicators are lit in flashing mode).
The selector pilot light switches on to indicate successful activation.
MAX
180W

MANUAL ELECTRONIC ACCELERATOR


(fig.73/C pos.”1”)
Allows the operator to accelerate engine RPMs and keep
them constant without pressing the accelerator pedal. STOP

- Use the selector to activate (fig.73/C Pos.”1”).


- The first click brings the engine to 1400 RPMs
- The second click brings the engine to 1800 RPMs
The selector pilot light switches on to indicate successful activation.

- ATTENTION
When the vehicle must be switched off, the engine RPMs
must be reduced to a minimum.

- ATTENTION
Do not use the electronic accelerator in the cab when the
basket and/or the radio control is used.
1
- ATTENTION
The vehicle does not move when the electronic accelerator
is engaged; the hydrostatic transmission is disengaged.

(fig.73/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/37
MAX
180W

Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

STOP

BOOM HEAD SOLENOID VALVE SWITCH


(optional)
(fig.74/C pos.”1”)

The switch is only installed in the presence of the arm head


solenoid valve (fig.75/C Pos.”2”).
It is possible to have halved hydraulic controls on the arm
head with the use of the solenoid valve.

Activate the push button (fig.74/C Pos.”1”) to bring electric


2
current to the solenoid valve, which will then deviate oil flow.

The selector (fig.74/C Pos.”1”) is used parallely with normal


service controls. First, choose with the selector where oil flow
will deviate, then carry out manoeuvres using service controls. 1

(fig.74/C)

(fig.75/C)

BOOM HEAD WORKING LIGHT SWITCH


(OPTIONAL)
(fig.75/C Pos.”C”)

Use the switch (fig.74/C Pos.”2”) to switch on the boom


head light (fig.76/C Pos.”1”). The pilot light switches on to 1 2
indicate successful activation.
Two working lights, one on the right side (fig. 76/C Pos. “1”)
and one on the left side fig. 76/C Pos. “2”) of the boom, can
be installed upon request.

(fig.76/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/38
STOP

ACCESSORY QUICK ATTACHMENT FROM CAB


(OPTIONAL)
(fig.77/C Pos.”1”) 1
Accessories block:

- Press the selector on side “B” (fig.77/C) to lock the ac-


cessory to the tool carriage plate.
When the selector is pressed the accessory quick con-
nection cylinder rods automatic movement toward the
outside takes place (fig.78/C), on both sides.
At stop (fig.79/C) the rod output is stopped automatically.
The accessory is blocked at the stop.

Accessory release:
A
- Move the safety lock mechanism “A” (fig.77/C) and press
the selector switch to release the accessory from the
tool carriage plate.
When the selector is pressed the accessory quick con-
nection cylinder rods automatic movement toward the
inside takes place, on both sides. B
The rod entry is stopped automatically at stop.
The accessory is released at stop and can be removed
from the tool carriage plate.

(fig.77/C)
- ATTENTION
On activation, a complete automatic lock/release procedure
is started.

- ATTENTION
IT IS mandatory to get off the machine and check the cor-
rect hitching of the accessory before starting to operate.

- ATTENTION
The block and release operations of the equipment is
allowed only with boom angle below 10°.

(fig.78/C)

(fig.79/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/39
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

CAB INSIDE VENTILATION

To activate ventilation, turn the selector (fig.81/C Pos.”1”) in


the clockwise direction.
The positions indicate, respectively:
- Switched off (fig.81/C Pos.”A”).
- First speed (fig.81/C Pos.”B”)
2 3 2
- Second speed (fig.81/C Pos.”C”) B C
- Third speed (fig.81/C Pos.”D”)
A D
- Turn the selector (fig.81/C Pos. “1”) in the counter clockwise
direction to reduce the flow of air or to switch off ventilation.
1 2
0 3
- To open the air vents (fig.82/C, Pos.“1-2-3-4-5”) press
down on one side of the vent and adjust the air flow di-
rection using the tabs or by turning the vent itself.
- To close the vents, push the tabs until they are in a hori- 1
zontal closed position.

Air temperature adjustment


(fig.81/C)
To adjust the temperature of the air coming out from the
vents, turn the tab (fig.82/C Pos.”A”)
Turn the valve toward the red part of the scale (lower part)
to increase temperature. Turning the valve towards the blue
part of the scale, the temperature will decrease until it is
1 2
about the same as the outside temperature.

5 A
(fig.83/C) (Air flow representation) (fig.82/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/40
AIR RECIRCULATION

When ventilation in the cab is activated, it is possible to insert


the air recirculation device using the specially provided vent
(fig.84/C Pos. “1”)

- Turning the lever “2” (fig.84/C) towards the right side of the
vehicle, the air recirculation device is engaged; part of the
air will be re-inhaled from within the cab, reducing the air
coming in from outside.

- Turn the knob (fig.84/C Pos.“2”) to lock or unlock the lever.

- Do the opposite to deactivate the air recirculation device.

NOTE:
2
Use the air recirculation device if operating the vehicle in a very
dusty area.

- ATTENTION
Do not use the air recirculation device for long periods of
time as the air could become stale and lacking in oxygen 1
and the operator may risk feeling ill. Activate and deactivate
the air recirculation device at 10 minute intervals. (fig.84/C)

AIR CONDITIONING
(Optional)

System operation:

1. Check that all doors and windows are closed.


3. With the engine is running, switch on the air conditioning
(fig.81/C Pos.“2”) and the fan (fig.81/G Pos.”1”) .
4. Open and adjust vents to obtain ideal cooling with regard
to cab temperature. Increase or decrease fan speed to
obtain desired conditions.
Should the air conditioning system not function properly, im-
mediately inspect the condenser located on the outside of
the cab above the emergency exit (fig.86/C Pos.”1”).

- ATTENTION
Switch on the air conditioning every 15 days, even in the
colder months, with the engine running at minimum (without
accelerating). In this way, the moveable parts like the com-
pressor and the general system can be lubricated.
(fig.85/C)
- ATTENTION
Keep the condenser (fig.86/C Pos.”1”) clean to keep the 1
conditioning system working efficiently.

- ATTENTION
DO NOT loosen any of air conditioning system’s tubes in or-
der to reach the condenser, because skin contact with cool-
ant can cause freezing.

(fig.86/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/41
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

TOWING THE VEHICLE

The vehicle may only be towed in an emergency and at low


speed (max 4 km/hour) and for short distances (max 500 m).

The operations to be carried out are as follows:


- Put the gear in neutral.
- Disengage the negative parking brake
- Connect the towing bracket between the towing vehicle
and the broken down vehicle.

- ATTENTION -
Never try to start up
the vehicle by towing or pushing it.
with the hydrostatic transmission engaged

When the engine is switched off the steering wheels servo


control does not work. If the engine cannot be kept running,
during towing keep in mind that it will be much more difficult
to operate the steering wheel.

The parking brake is engaged with the engine switched off.

AXA 1432
If the engine cannot be kept running during vehicle towing,
disengage the parking brake manually, following instructions
given in paragraph “Disengagement of Parking Brake with
engine switched off”.

- ATTENTION
During towing with the engine on, stay seated in the driver’s seat to
prevent that the parking brake become disengaged automatically.

The towing bracket must be connected to the towing set-up


provided marked by a special symbol (fig.87/C).

- ATTENTION
The vehicle must be towed with a towing bracket.
The towing bracket must be able to support a towing weight
of 15,000 Kg.

Do not tow the vehicle on public roads and for long dis-
tances. If possible, keep the yellow flashing lights and emer-
gency lights on.
Do not tow the vehicle on a slope.

- ATTENTION -
Do not stop between
the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle.

- ATTENTION -
The operations described above should be
AXA 1432

carried out by expert personnel.

(fig.87C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/42
Put the gear shift in neutral.

Operating Description

- Switch off the engine


- Turn the lever (fig. 88/C Pos. “1”) of the hydraulic valve
towards the center of the vehicle, bringing it to the 1
closed position. The valve is located under the vehicle,
in the middle, near the reducer.
- Place the gear selector pin (fig. 89/C Pos. “1”) in the
neutral position, at halfway (fig. 89/C Pos. “2”), using a
screwdriver.

- ATTENTION
Before towing the vehicle, switch on the dashboard and en-
sure that the pilot light “gear engaged” on the central dash- (fig.88/C)
board is switched off and that the letter “N” appears on the
LCD display. If this is not the case, repeat operation and
put the gear in neutral again.

- ATTENTION
Once the towing operations have been completed, reopen
the valve, bringing it back to its original position.
To insert the gear, use the switch provided as described in
paragraph “Fast/slow Gear Switch”.

N 2
(fig.89/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/43
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

Disengagement of negative brake


with engine switch off
Mod. Hercules 160.10 - 210.10

Operating Description

- Remove the aluminum covers (fig.92/C Pos.“A”) on the


front and rear axle using a pincers (fig.93/C Pos.“1”), un-
screwing them in the counter clockwise direction. A A
- Unscrew the internal screw in the counter clockwise direc-
tion (fig.94/C Pos.“3”) using a key (fig.94/C Pos.“2). Bring
it to the end; it should stick out approximately 15mm.
- In these conditions, the negative brake is unlocked. (fig.92/C)
- To reinsert the negative brake, re-screw in the screw in the
clockwise direction (fig.94/C Pos.“3”) with a key (fig.94/C
Pos.”2”) until it sticks out about 5-6 mm. In this position,
the negative brake is restored and unlocking must be done
hydraulically.
- During the operations, pay attention not to loose or da-
mage the gasket that is found inside the aluminium lids
(fig.95/C Pos.”2”,fig.96/C Pos.”2”), oil could leak from the
caps. Replace immediately id lost or damaged.

- ATTENTION -
DO NOT USE THE VEHICLE
WITH THE HAND BRAKE DISCONNECTED.
ONCE TOWING OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETE
BRING EVERYTHING BACK TO ITS INITAL POSITION
1

- ATTENTION -
The operations described above should
be carried out by expert personnel.
(fig.93/C)

A
15mm 2
(fig.95/C)

(fig.94/C)

3
A
5mm
(fig.96/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/44
Disengagement of negative brake
with engine switch off
Mod. Hercules 120.10 1 1
Operating Description
2 2
- Loosen the lock nuts located on both sides of the central
body of the rear axle (fig.97/C Pos.“2”). 2 2
- Tighten the screws (fig.97/C Pos.“1”) until resistance is
encountered; once towing has been completed, check 1 1
the turns made in order to bring the screws back to their
original position.
- Tighten the screws again, about 1,5 turns.

The brake will be unlocked. Once towing operations are


complete bring everything back to its original position.

- ATTENTION
It is IMPORTANT to re-screw in the screws with the
same number of turns used to unscrew them.
(fig.97/C)

- ATTENTION -
DO NOT USE THE VEHICLE
WITH THE HAND BRAKE DISCONNECTED.
ONCE TOWING OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETE
BRING EVERYTHING BACK TO ITS INITAL POSITION

- ATTENTION -
The operations described above should be
carried out by expert personnel.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/45
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

Disengaging the negative brake


with a fault in the control box
Mod. Hercules 120.10 - 160.10 - 210.10

If the control box malfunctions (fig. 100/C Pos.”1”), the ma-


chine will be partially unusable. The control box activates
a number of safety blocks so as to prevent improper and
uncontrollable use.
Disengaging the negative brake is one of these safety features.
If it is not possible to resolve the fault onsite, the negative
brake can be released so as to go to the closest authorised
workshop.
1
2
- ATTENTION
The negative brake can only be released if the engine is
running and the battery works regularly.

The negative brake is released as follows:


(fig.100/C)
- Make sure the engine is switched off and the dashboard
is not electrically powered.
- Remove the lower part of the left dashboard (fig. 100/C
Pos.”2”).
- Take hold of connector “X92.p” that is fastened to con-
nector “X92.s” (fig. 101/C).
- Insert connector “X92.p” into connector “X92.s” (fig.
102/C).
- Connect the power supply of the dashboard and start
the engine.

- ATTENTION
In these conditions, the negative brake is disconnected.

- ATTENTION -
Never use the machine
with the negative brake disconnected.
Complete the maintenance operations
and restore the initial conditions. (fig.101/C)

- ATTENTION -
It is recommended that expert personnel
implement the above-mentioned operations

(fig.102/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/46
CATALYTIC PURIFIER (optional)
(fig.103/C Pos.”1”)

Duration
As the catalyst is not actively involved in the chemical reac-
2
tion it provokes, its life is theoretically unlimited. However, due
to certain conditions such as: engines not perfectly tuned,
vehicle vibrations and the abrasive effect of fumes on the 1
support, the life of the catalyst may be shortened. In reality,
the life of the catalytic purifier is about 10,000 working hours.

Maintenance
The catalyst is activated by the high temperature of the
fumes which also prevents any particles from depositing on
the honeycomb; less maintenance is, consequently, needed.
We recommend cleaning the purifier every 500 working
hours. To clean the catalytic purifier, contact an authorized
DIECI service center.
(fig.103/C)

WATER PURIFIER (optional)


(fig.103/C Pos.”2”)

The water driven purifier is manufactured entirely in stain-


less steel with titanium and is resistant to high temperatures
and to corrosive sulphurous compounds which are present
in the exhaust fumes.
It consists of a horizontal cylindrical body (sized accord-
ing to engine power) which makes up the water tank, two
mounting brackets and a cylindrical tower located on the up-
per part of the water tank that contains the separator.
The gases are directed through an entry tube into the inte-
rior part of the purifier and are passed through the water in
fine bubbles. The carbonaceous particles become heavier
upon contact with the water and fall to the bottom of the
water tank. The gases are then directed towards the sepa-
rator which recovers the carbonaceous particles that have
not fused with the water. The white smoke emitted from the
exhaust is simply water vapor.

Maintenance
Maintenance of the water driven purifier is EXTREMELY IM-
PORTANT and the water must be changed every 8 work-
ing hours . The tank must be emptied using the spherical
drain valve and clean water must be added through the
loading and level cock.
The purifier’s efficiency is demonstrated by the black sludge
that can be seen when the water is changed. The purifier
should be cleaned every 300 working hours: drain the wa-
ter and clean the inside for a few minutes with a pressurised
jet. DIECI also provides the additive TAM which, if added to
the water at every change, helps to keep the purifier clean.
TAM also improves the performance of the purifier: it neu-
tralises sulphuric and sulphurous acids.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/47
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the vehicle

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/48
GETTING TO KNOW AND
USING THE MACHINE

INTEGRATED DEVICES

“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/51
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the machine
Integrated devices

ANY MODIFICATION TO THE MACHINE REQUIRES A NEW TEST TO


CHECK CONFORMITY WITH THE “ ” MACHINE DIRECTIVE 98/37.
THIS ALSO APPLIES IN CASE OF REPAIRS WITH NON-ORIGINAL
SPARE PARTS.

USE OF THE MACHINE BEFORE THE CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL


HAVE BEEN CAREFULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD IS FORBIDDEN.

REGARDLESS OF THE OPERATOR’S EXPERIENCE IN THIS AREA, IT IS


ESSENTIAL THAT HE/SHE LEARN THE EXACT LOCATION AND FUNCTION
OF ALL INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BEFORE USING THE VEHICLE.

THE IMAGES, DESCRIPTIONS AND MEASUREMENTS IN THIS CHAPTER


ALL REFER TO STANDARD MACHINES.

UPON REQUEST, YOUR MACHINE CAN BE FITTED OUT WITH OPTIONAL


CONTROLS AND ACCESSORIES.

ANY FUNCTION OR PROCEDURE REGARDING THE USE AND FITTING OF MACHINE


ATTACHMENTS NOT DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL ARE STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.

IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO MAKE ANY USE OF THE MACHINE OTHER


THAN THE USE DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL.

READING AND UNDERSTANDING CHAPTER “B” (SAFETY STANDARDS) BEFORE


READING CHAPTER “C” AND BEFORE USING THE MACHINE IS COMPULSORY.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/52
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
(fig.200/C)

(fig.200/C)
Main beam headlights pilot light Front axle alignment pilot light
(blue) (yellow)

Direction indicator pilot light Rear axle alignment pilot light


(green) (yellow)

Glow plug preheat pilot light


Not used
(yellow)

Blocked air filter pilot light


Not used
(red)

Hydrostatic oil filter pilot light


Not used
(red)

Engine oil pressure pilot light


Not used
(red)

Generator pilot light Brake system failure indicator


(red) (red)

Insufficient pressure in the High hydraulic oil temperature indicator


parking brake accumulator pilot light (red)
(red)

Parking brake pilot light (red) Fuel level indicator

General alarm pilot light (red) Engine water temperature instrument

Mechanical gear engaged pilot light Forward gear pilot light


A (green) (green)

Mechanical gear engaged speed indicator light Reverse gear pilot light
2 (green) (green)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/53
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the machine
Integrated devices

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

The following functions are displayed:

- Hour counter (6 figures including one decimal and an hourglass) (fig.201/C Pos.“C”).
- Clock (4 figures) (fig.201/C Pos.“A”).
- Tachymeter (3 figures including one decimal, plus km/h, m/h and mph) (fig.201/C Pos.“C”).
- Odometer (6 figures including one decimal plus km and miles) (fig.201/C Pos.“C”).
- Neutral gear engaged (fig.201/C Pos.“B”).
- Engine errors (large flashing E + 3 figures above) (fig.201/C Pos. “A”, fig.201/C Pos.“B”, fig.201/C Pos.“C”)
- Service (large flashing S + number of hours to go before a service is required) (fig.2/C2 Pos.“A”, fig.201/C Pos.“B”)

A B

X1 COL1 DP5

RPM 1 2 3 4
X14 5
X13 AM

11 12 9 8 7 6

Vkmip/h
X12 DP9 X11 X9 X7 X5
X10 X6
C
X8

(fig.201/C)

Tachymeter (optional)

The tachymeter allows you to display the speed of the machine in real time.

Odometer (optional)

The odometer allows you to view the kilometres travelled by the machine. This instrument is in conjunction with the tachymeter.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/54
1 2

(fig.202/C)
PUSH BUTTONS

There are two integrated push buttons on the panel. During normal use the two push buttons have the same function.
- Pushbutton “1” (fig.202/C) to change the information on the display.
- Pushbutton “2” (fig.202/C) to change the information on the display.

Changing the information on the display

Press button “1” (fig.202/C) or “2” (fig.202/C) to change the information displayed as follows:
1. Hour counter and Clock.
2. Speed and Clock.
3. Odometer and Clock.
4. Hour counter and Clock.
The information normally displayed is the Clock and Hour Counter, if the tachymeter is installed, the Clock and Speed will auto-
matically be displayed.

Clock adjustment

To adjust the clock:


- Switch off the dashboard.
- Press and hold down button “2” (fig. 202/C).
- Switch on the dashboard.
- Press and hold down button “2” (fig.202/C) for 1.5 seconds during the “check up time”.
- You are now in “Adjustment” mode

When the minutes are flashing, press:


- Push button “1” (fig.202/C) to increase.
- Push button “2” (fig.202/C) to confirm.

When the hours are flashing, press:


- Push button “1” (fig.202/C) to increase.
- Push button “2” (fig.202/C) to confirm.

The adjustment phase will then finish and the instrument will start to work normally (the initial check up is excluded).

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/55
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the machine
Integrated devices

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER: INITIAL CHECK UP OF THE INSTRUMENTS

When the instrument cluster is switched on, several pilot lights, the buzzer and every display segment come on for 1.5 seconds.
Tables (fig.203/C) describing every pilot light in the instrument cluster and their behaviour during the check up can be found below.

INITIAL INITIAL
PILOT LIGHTS CHECK UP PILOT LIGHTS CHECK UP

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

NO YES

NO YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

A YES YES

2 YES

(fig.203/C)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/56
GENERAL ALARM PILOT LIGHT

The general emergency/alarm is triggered when:

- there is an engine error

- one of the pilot lights in the table below lights up

- the engine is over-revved

Engine errors

The engine is equipped with an electronic control unit, which communicates directly with the instrument cluster.
Malfunctions are signalled by the general alarm pilot light accompanied by an acoustic alarm that lasts for 1.5 seconds and the
error code is displayed on the LCD.

Instrument cluster pilot lights

Several pilot lights that are particularly important for the life of the machine and safe machine use are connected to the general
alarm pilot light (fig.204/C) with an acoustic signal that lasts 1.5 seconds.

Pilot light Pilot light Acoustic signal (buzzer)


1 2

Connection 1 YES (1.5 seconds)

Connection 2 YES (1.5 seconds)

Connection 3 YES (1.5 seconds)

Connection 4 YES (1.5 seconds)

Connection 5 YES (1.5 seconds)

Connection 6 YES (1.5 seconds)

(fig.204/C)

Engine over-revs

The over-rev condition is signalled when the engine speed indicator reaches 2350 rpm.
The condition is signalled by the general alarm pilot lamp flashing and a continuous acoustic alarm (buzzer).
The alarm stops when the engine falls below 2320 rpm.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/57
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the machine
Integrated devices

Engine errors

Engine errors are signalled by the general alarm pilot light accompanied by an acoustic alarm (buzzer) that lasts for 1.5
seconds and an error code is displayed on the LCD (fig.205/C Pos.“3”). The error is displayed until the operator presses but-
ton “1” (fig.205/C) or “2” (fig.205/C) for 3 seconds. The “general alarm” pilot light will stay on until the error has been removed.
By pressing button “1” (fig.205/C) or “2” (fig.205/C) for 3 seconds, the error is no longer displayed but it is stored in the memory.
One second will lapse before a second error is displayed, the error will be signalled by the buzzer for 1.5 seconds and the new
error will be displayed. The same procedure will apply to every subsequent error.

1 2

(fig.105/C)

RPM

AM
3

Vkmip/h

Error menu

To enter the error menu, press and hold down buttons “1” (fig.205/C) and “2” (fig.105/C) at the same time for 3 seconds.
Press the right button 2 quickly (for less than 3 seconds) to go on to the next error. When you reach the last error “ESC” will be
displayed. To exit, press and hold down the left button “1” for 3 seconds.
Press button “2” (fig.205/C) again to start from the first error again. The panel stores up to ten errors.
If one of the errors is present when the machine is switched on, the panel will switch on the “general alarm pilot light”, sound the
buzzer for 1.5 seconds and the error message will appear on the display. If the error disappears, it is still stored in the memory.

Error messages have priority over service messages.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/58
Below is an example of a scrolling error message on the display.

RPM

AM

Vkmip/h
(fig.206/C)

RPM

AM

Vkmip/h

RPM

AM

Vkmip/h
(fig.207/C)

If there are any display errors, the last display appears with the word “ESC”.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/59
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the machine
Integrated devices

SERVICE

When the machine needs to be serviced, the letter “S” is displayed on the LCD (fig.208/C Pos.“2”) with the corresponding servi-
ce hours (fig.208/C Pos.“1”).
This will only be displayed for 10 seconds when the dashboard is switched on. The letter “S” will flash.

RPM
1
AM 2

Vkmip/h
(fig.208/C)

The hour count is managed by the panel.

Every 250 hours, the flashing letter “S” and the service interval reached must be displayed every time the dashboard is switched
on (e.g. 250, 500, 1000 ….) as shown in the table.

The service message is disabled automatically 20 hours after the servicing coupon is displayed

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/60
ERROR LIST

Display
Type Component Description
CODE
001 Diagnostic Throttle Position Sensor data erratic intermittent or incorrect
Diagnostic Throttle Position Sensor Voltage above normal or shorted high
002
Diagnostic Secondary throttle position sensor Voltage above normal or shorted high
Diagnostic Throttle Position Sensor Voltage below normal or shorted low
004
Diagnostic Secondary throttle position sensor Voltage below normal or shorted low
Diagnostic Throttle Position Sensor abnormal frequency, pulse width, or period
006
Diagnostic Secondary throttle position sensor abnormal frequency, pulse width, or period
Diagnostic Throttle Position Sensor Bad Device or component
008
Diagnostic Secondary throttle position sensor Bad Device or component
010 Diagnostic Engine Oil pressure Sensor Voltage above normal or shorted high
011 Diagnostic Engine Oil pressure Sensor Voltage below normal or shorted low
Engine oil pressure sensor 5V
012 Diagnostic Engine Oil pressure Sensor
supply connection open circuit
013 Event Engine Oil pressure Sensor Low oil pressure - WARNING
014 Event Engine Oil pressure Sensor Low oil Pressure - DERATE
015 Event Engine Oil pressure Sensor Low Oil Pressure - SHUTDOWN
016 Event Inlet Manifold Air Temp Sensor High Intake manifold temperature - WARNING
017 Event Inlet Manifold Air Temp Sensor High Intake manifold temperature - DERATE
018 Diagnostic Inlet Manifold Air Temp Sensor Voltage above normal or shorted high
019 Diagnostic Inlet Manifold Air Temp Sensor Voltage below normal or shorted low
020 Diagnostic Inlet Manifold Pressure Sensor Voltage above normal or shorted high
021 Diagnostic Inlet Manifold Pressure Sensor Voltage below normal or shorted low
Inlet Manifold Pressure Sensor
022 Diagnostic Inlet Manifold Pressure Sensor
5V supply connection open circuit
023 Event Engine Coolant Temp Sensor High coolant temp - WARNING
024 Event Engine Coolant Temp Sensor High coolant temp - DERATE
025 Diagnostic Engine Coolant Temp Sensor voltage above normal or shorted high
026 Event Engine Coolant Temp Sensor High coolant temp SHUTDOWN
027 Diagnostic Engine Coolant Temp Sensor Voltage below normal or shorted low
028 Diagnostic Fuel Rail pressure sensor Voltage above normal or shorted high
029 Diagnostic Fuel Rail pressure sensor Voltage below normal or shorted low
030 Diagnostic Keyswitch data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
031 Diagnostic ECM battery power Excessive battery power
032 Diagnostic ECM battery power Low battery power
033 Diagnostic ECM battery power intermittent
034 Diagnostic Speed/Timing sensor abnormal signal frequency
035 Event Engine Speed Engine Overspeed - WARNING
Diagnostic Throttle Position Sensor Idle validation switch
036
Diagnostic Secondary throttle position sensor data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
038 Diagnostic Customer or system parameters data incorrect

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/61
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the machine
Integrated devices

039 Diagnostic Engine software data incorrect


040 Diagnostic SAE J1939 data link Abnormal update
041 Diagnostic Turbo Wastegate Solenoid Current Low
042 Diagnostic Turbo Wastegate Solenoid Current High
043 Diagnostic Turbo Wastegate Turbo Wastegate not responding
044 Diagnostic Cylinder #1 Injector Injector Data Incorrect
045 Diagnostic Cylinder #1 Injector Injector Current Low
046 Diagnostic Cylinder #1 Injector Injector Current High
047 Diagnostic Cylinder #1 Injector Injector not reponding
048 Diagnostic Cylinder #2 Injector Injector Data Incorrect
049 Diagnostic Cylinder #2 Injector Injector Current Low
050 Diagnostic Cylinder #2 Injector Injector Current High
051 Diagnostic Cylinder #2 Injector Injector not reponding
052 Diagnostic Cylinder #3 Injector Injector Data Incorrect
053 Diagnostic Cylinder #3 Injector Injector Current Low
054 Diagnostic Cylinder #3 Injector Injector Current High
055 Diagnostic Cylinder #3 Injector Injector not reponding
056 Diagnostic Cylinder #4 Injector Injector Data Incorrect
057 Diagnostic Cylinder #4 Injector Injector Current Low
058 Diagnostic Cylinder #4 Injector Injector Current High
059 Diagnostic Cylinder #4 Injector Injector not reponding
060 Diagnostic Cylinder #5 Injector Injector Data Incorrect
061 Diagnostic Cylinder #5 Injector Injector Current Low
062 Diagnostic Cylinder #5 Injector Injector Current High
063 Diagnostic Cylinder #5 Injector Injector not reponding
064 Diagnostic Cylinder #6 Injector Injector Data Incorrect
065 Diagnostic Cylinder #6 Injector Injector Current Low
066 Diagnostic Cylinder #6 Injector Injector Current High
067 Diagnostic Cylinder #6 Injector Injector not reponding
ECM 8V DC supply – voltage
068 Diagnostic 8V DC supply
above normal or shorted high
ECM 8V DC supply – voltage
069 Diagnostic 8V DC supply
below normal or shorted low
070 Diagnostic Primary Engine Speed Sensor abnormal signal frequency
071 Diagnostic Secondary Engine Speed Sensor abnormal signal frequency
072 Diagnostic 5V sensor DC supply voltage above normal or shorted high
073 Diagnostic 5V sensor DC supply voltage below normal or shorted low
074 Diagnostic Primary to secondary speed sig calibration fault
075 Diagnostic Primary to secondary speed sig Calibration required
076 Diagnostic Fuel Rail Pump Output current low
077 Diagnostic Fuel Rail Pump Output current high
078 Diagnostic Fuel Rail Pump Not responding
079 Diagnostic Glow Plug Start Aid relay Current Low
080 Diagnostic Glow Plug Start Aid relay Current High

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/62
081 Event Exhaust High Temperature
082 Event Fuel Rail pressure sensor Low Fuel Rail Pressure
083 Event Fuel Rail pressure sensor High Fuel Rail Pressure
084 Event Intake Manifold pressure sensor Low Intake Manifold Pressure
085 Event Intake Manifold pressure sensor High Intake Manifold Pressure
086 Diagnostic Intake Manifold pressure sensor Pressure Abnormal Rate of Change
087 Diagnostic Key Switch Erratic

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/63
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using the machine
Integrated devices

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/64
“3B6 - LOAD LIMITING DEVICE”

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/65
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FOR EDITING PURPOSES

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/66
GENERAL INFORMATION

The MC2M system is a load limiting device for telehandlers in the HERCULES series.

Its main specifications are:


• Limiting device manager pursuant to standards ISO13000 and EN280
• Black Box and alarm management with 500 storable events

LAYOUT

2
4

Ref. Description N°
1 Control Panel 1
2 Angle power winder/Extension with dual transducers 1
3 Pressure transducers 4
4 Limiting device unit 1

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/67
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

DISPLAY

Operator panel
Load condition % and alarms

1 2 3 4

6 2.2 4.0 6.1 11

1. The LCD bar on the alphanumeric display


indicates the percentage of the load that is being lifted compared to the maximum load allowed in the working conditions.

2. GREEN reference:
Safety zone.

3. YELLOW reference:
Warning zone (load lifted more than 90% of admitted load)

4. RED reference:
Block zone (load lifted more than 100% of admitted load)

5. Green pilot light on:


Safety

6. Yellow pilot light on:


Warning (external audible warning device enabled)

7. Red pilot light on:


Movements blocked (external audible warning device enabled)

The data displayed give the operator an indication of the work conditions.
The indicated weights and measurements are subject to margins of error (10% on the maximum values).
E.g. 3.6 ton > 4.0 ton > 4.4 ton

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/68
MAIN WORK DATA

8 9 10 11

2.2 4.0 6.1 11

8. WEIGHT OF THE RAISED LOAD


Graphic symbol below: (ACT) Reading in “Tons” with one decimal

9. MAXIMUM LOAD ALLOWED in the present machine configuration.


Graphic symbol below: (MAX) Reading in “Tons” with one decimal

10. WORKING RADIUS: (distance from the telescopic boom fulcrum to the projection of the load application point)
Graphic symbol below: (R) Reading in “Metres”, with a decimal point

11. WORK CONFIGURATION

NOTE:
If the British Imperial system is selected, the loads are indicated in “Pounds/1000” and the geometric data is expressed in “feet”.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/69
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

COMPLEMENTARY WORK DATA READINGS

12 13 14

6.7 48.5 7.5 11

Press “ENTER” once for a few seconds to display the values regarding complementary readings.
After this the display returns to the main ACT, MAX, and R readings.

12. BOOM LENGTH


Reading in “metres” with one decimal

13. BOOM ANGLE


Reading in “degrees”.

14. HEIGHT ABOVE GROUND


Reading in “metres” with one decimal

NOTE:
If the British Imperial system is selected, the loads are indicated in “Pounds/1000” and the geometric data is expressed in “feet”.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/70
EQUIPEMENT AND OPERATING MODE

The vehicle has only one operating mode.


On the normally displayed main page, the Selected Attachment Table (T) and the Operating Mode (OM) of the machine are
displayed in the highlighted area in the form of numbers.
In the example in the figure, the indicating working condition is:

T=1
Forks

Forks
1
e

Referring to the symbols on the control panel, these are the possible selections:

T (Manual) Selectable from the control panel:

1 = Forks 0,6 mt 9 = Shifting fork 0,6 mt


2 = Hook 0 = ..................
3 = Basket A = ..................
4 = Capstan 6 ton B = ..................
5 = Shifting fork 0,6 mt C = ..................
6 = Centering handler D = ..................
7 = Winch 12 ton E = ..................
8 = Winch 8 ton F = ..................

NOTE: Not all the vehicles can be used with the complete range of attachments.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/71
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

UN-ENCODED DISPLAY OF ATTACHMENTS AND OPERATING MODES

To better understand work conditions, or the operating mode (OM) and the attachment (Tool) (t), they can be displayed in text
form: press INDEX.
The display shows the unencoded text of the Operating Mode and the selected Attachment Table.
This display is maintained for 3 seconds. After this the panel returns to the main working display.
Only one operational mode is present in the Hercules machine (1).

Forks
1
e

ATTACHMENT AND OPERATING MODE SELECTION

Starting from the basic display, keep the key turned and press INDEX to go to the page with the current Operating Mode (OM)
text and the Table (T) regarding the attachment in use.
While in this condition, press INDEX repeatedly to select the appropriate Table: every time the button is pressed one of the avai-
lable attachments is selected. During this phase the system is automatically blocked.
After selecting the correct Table, press ENTER to confirm your selection and make the control operative. Then release the key.

Forks
1
e

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/72
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS AND ALARM MESSAGES

The limiting device is provided with a self-diagnosis system that detects transducer malfunctions, cable breakages and internal
electronic malfunctions.
When a fault is detected, the limiting device goes into safety mode blocking any dangerous manoeuvres and at the same time
the display panel shows the LCD bar at the bottom of the scale.

Alarm 18
2.2 4.0 6.1 11
e

The alarm code is automatically displayed.

The problem can be identified via the alarm code.


The alarm codes can be found in the appendix entitled “Alarm Codes” along with their causes and suggestions for resolving the
problems and restoring correct functioning.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/73
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAYS

The diagnostics functions are always accessible or possible without password.


Keep the Enter key pressed from the main screen for about 3 seconds to access the diagnostics mode.
Then press “+” to select the wanted page.
To facilitate research of the page, the number of the page and identification text are displayed on the page change.

P01 Alarms

Alarm xx Alarm: Code of alarm present (0=no Alarm)


Warning xx Warning: Warning code (0=Ok)

P02 LMI

P = Lifting cylinder differential pressure


W = Load read by system (t)
P100 W 4.1 M5.0 M = Maximum allowed load in current position
A 45 L 8.5 R6.0 A = Boom Angle
L = Boom Extension
R = Range from Forks centre at boom rotation fulcrum
P03 & P04 Pressures A e Pressures B

P = Lifting cylinder differential pressure


L: Base side pressure
P100 L: xxx H: xxx H: Rod side pressure
P40 l: xxx h: xxx p = Compensation cylinder differential pressure
l: Compensation base side pressure
h: Compensation cylinder rod side pressure

P05 Boom
Angle and main boom extension from winder reading.
A 11.1 12.2 1.1 A: Angle 1, Angle 2, differential between the 2 angles
L 8.5 8.6 0.1 L: Extension 1, Extension 2, differential between the 2 extensions

P06 Boom Lift

P07 Telescopic

P08 Forks

P09 Option

P10 Wheels All.

P11 Leveling

P12 Fan Drive

P13 Transmis.

P14 Various 1

P15 Various 2

The information in pages from P06 to P15 are intended for the Dieci After-sales Assistance Centres.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/74
MIDAC ALARMS

Alarms code Description of alarms relative to data control


11 CRC_ERROR: Parameters corrupt - Re-program the board
12 CRC_ERROR: Program corrupt - Re-program the board
13 CRC_ERROR: Tables corrupt - Re-program the board
14 CRC_ERROR: “SAVE” to eliminate the error
15 BYPASS
90 OVERLOAD_LMI: Overload threshold 1
91 OVERLOAD_LMI: Overload threshold 2
92 OVERLOAD_LMI: Overload threshold 3

Alarms code Description of the Angle/Extension transducers alarms


100 TRANSD_FAULT: Angle 1 sensor fault
101 TRANSD_FAULT: Angle 2 sensor fault
102 TRANSD_FAULT: Angle 1-2 sensor difference
110 TRANSD_FAULT: Extension 1 sensor fault
111 TRANSD_FAULT: Extension 2 sensor fault
112 TRANSD_DIFF_ERROR: Extension 1-2 sensors difference

Alarms code Description of ACT Boards alarms


300 UNIT_ERROR: Error or fault detected on the board (Cable rewinder)
301 CAN_BUS_TIMEOUT: No CanBus message from ACT1A (Cable rewinder)
302 UNIT_ERROR: Error or fault detected on the ACT1B board (Cable rewinder)
303 CAN_BUS_TIMEOUT: No CanBus message from ACT1B (Cable rewinder)

Alarms code Description of Joystick alarms


180 TRANSD_FAULT: Lifting signal cab joystick fault
181 TRANSD_FAULT: Extension signal cab joystick fault
182 TRANSD_FAULT: Swivelling signal cab joystick fault
184 TRANSD_FAULT: Auxiliary signal cab joystick fault
185 TRANSD_FAULT: Lifting signal cab joystick fault
186 TRANSD_FAULT: Extension signal cab joystick fault
187 TRANSD_FAULT: Swivelling signal cab joystick fault
189 TRANSD_FAULT: Auxiliary signal cab joystick fault
190 TRANSD_DIFF_ERROR: Cab joystick lifting signal differential error
191 TRANSD_DIFF_ERROR: Cab joystick swivelling signal differential error
193 TRANSD_DIFF_ERROR: Cab joystick auxiliary signal differential error
194 TRANSD_DIFF_ERROR: Cab joystick extension signal differential error
195 TRANSD_FAULT: Lifting signal fault from radiocontrol
196 TRANSD_FAULT: Extension signal fault from radiocontrol
197 TRANSD_FAULT: Swivelling signal fault from radiocontrol
199 TRANSD_FAULT: Auxiliary signal fault from radiocontrol

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/75
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

MIDAC ALARMS

Alarms code Description of Joystick alarms


200 TRANSD_FAULT: Lifting signal fault from car push button control panel
201 TRANSD_FAULT: Extension signal fault from car push button control panel
202 TRANSD_FAULT: Swivel signal fault from car push button control panel
204 TRANSD_FAULT: Auxiliary signal fault from car push button control panel

Alarms code Description of pressure transducer alarms


120 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on lifting base "A" pressure transducer
121 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on lifting base "B" pressure transducer
122 TRANSD_FAULT: Lifting base pressure signals differential error
125 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on lifting rod "A" pressure transducer
126 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on lifting rod "B" pressure transducer
127 TRANSD_FAULT: Lifting rod pressure signals differential error
130 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on compensator base "A" pressure transducer
131 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on compensator base "B" pressure transducer
132 TRANSD_FAULT: Compensator base pressure signals differential error
135 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on compensator rod "A" pressure transducer
136 TRANSD_FAULT: Fault on compensator rod "B" pressure transducer
137 TRANSD_FAULT: Compensator rod pressure signals differential error

Alarms code Idr alarms description


151 CAN_BUS_TIMEOUT: Fault on CanBus line

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/76
STATE SIGNALLING

Codice Warning Description


3 ALARM

4 NO_MAN_IN

5 LIMITING DEVICE_BLOCK

6 CAR_OVERLOADING

7 HIGH_ANGLE_55

10 NOT_ALLOWED

11 SLOW_STOP_HIGH

12 SLOW_LMI

26 MAXIMUM_ANGLE

27 BOOM_NOT_CLOSED

38 ROPES_OVERLOAD

46 MINIMUM_ANGLE

47 BROKEN_BOOM_POTENTIOMETER

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/77
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

TRANSDUCERS ANGLE, EXTENSION AND PRESSURE ALARM

The used transducers give a variable voltage at output proportional to the measured physical size value.

The program converts the input voltage and with adequate procedures, gives the measured size typically in:
• Metres per distance measurements
• Degrees per angle measurements
• Kg * 1000 for weight measurements
• Bar for pressure measurements

Four levels of alarm are envisioned:


1. Reading of the not converted signal below to 0.25 v
2. Reading of the not converted signal above 4.75v
3. Value of the converted signal below minimum
4. Value of the converted signal above maximum

In particular, alarms 1 and 2 allow firstly highlighting any calibration errors.


Supposing a machine which minimum extension is 5 m and maximum is 15 m, alarm 3 intervenes if the measured extension is
below 4.7 m, whereas alarm 4 if the same is above 15.3 m.
The tolerances for the intervention of these alarms is 0.3 m for extensions and 4 degrees for the angles.
A delay of about 1 second is envisioned on the activation of each individual alarm.

No connection of the positive signal


Alarm Cursor not connected
Level 1 Short-circuit of the screen with cursor
Faulty transducer
Alarm No connection of the transducer mass
Level 2 Faulty transducer
Calibration not executed
Alarm
Transducer mechanically moved, out of calibration
Level 3
Faulty transducer
Calibration not executed
Alarm
Transducer mechanically moved, out of calibration
Level 4
Faulty transducer
With regard to the alarms relating to the pressure transducers; in case of the lifting cylinder, only the alarm on the minimum
value is present as it may happen that when lifting a heavy load, the pressure reaches the transducer limit.
The system is in safe conditions in that an overload of the limit device intervenes.

The possible causes may be:


• Break of the connection cable
• Short-circuit on the connection cable
• Break of the pressure transducer
• Fault on the board

What to do:
• If the alarm appears when the boom moves, check the cable that almost certainly interrupts, or a section subject to move-
ment goes in short-circuit.
• Attempt loosening the connector and check the contacts are not oxidised. It may happen that, following incorrect fixing,
water has entered the connector.
• Measure the power supply on the connect and, if required, verify the continuity of the connections.
Pay attention to the screen shield; it may happen that a small scratch places a signal in short-circuit.
• Eventually replace the transducer.
• More rarely, a fault of the board is possible. In any case, before replacing the board verify functioning of the input channel
by trying to invert the transducers.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/78
TRANSDUCERS CONGRUENCY ALARM

For safety reasons, extensions, angles and pressures are read by 2 different transducers, and the values are compared.

Alarms are envisioned if the difference between the values of the 2 transducers is above:

• 0.3 m in case of extension


• 4 degrees in case of angles
• 10 Bar in case of pressure

The alarm is generated when the 2 signals are different for at least 1 second.

Causes:

• Transducer or connections fault


• Transducers not aligned

What to do:

• In presence of faults, the checks are the same as for verifying the transducers
• Eventually calibrate the transducers

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/79
Model E.T. HERCULES Getting to know and using tha machine
Integrated devices

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C/80
MAINTENANCE
and
REGISTERING

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/1
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Any modification TO THE VEHICLE REQUIRES a new


verification of conformity with directive 98/37 “ “
THIS APPLIES EVEN IN CASES OF repair WORK COMPLETED
with non original parts.

ANY procedures and maintenance operations not described in


this manual are strictly forbidden and must ONLY be CARRIED
OUT BY authoriZed repair centres AND qualified personnel.

the operator MAY ONLY CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS:


liquid level check, air filter cleaning,
tyre pressure check. these operations must be
carried out in compliance with all safety regulations
described in this manual.

The knurled plates (bulb plates) and the cab floor are the
only parts of the vehicle that can be stepped on. Use a ladder
(suitable for the purpose intended) to reach
maintenance parts that cannot be reached from the ground.

chapters “B” and “C” must be read


(Safety Regulations - Getting to know and using the vehicle)
before reading chapter “D”.

do not perform maintanence work on the vehicle if


this chapter has not been read and understood.

D/2 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
MAINTENANCE PRESCRIPTIONS

INTRODUCTION Owner/ Operator Assistance

This vehicle has been designed and built to provide maxi- DIECI and its authorized dealers seek to fully satisfy their clients’
mum performance, savings and facilitate its operation in needs. Therefore, clients are encouraged to contact their deal-
various working conditions. Before delivery, the vehicle was er’s assistance department whenever any problems may arise.
tested both by the Manufacturer and by the Dealer in order
to ensure top condition upon supply. To preserve these con- When the vehicle is inspected, the dealer will provide the
ditions and guarantee problem-free operation, it is important names of the staff members in charge of the maintenance
to carry out ordinary maintenance operation described in and service work.
this manual at an authorized DIECI dealer in accordance
with the maintenance schedule specified. To ensure a good service experience from the dealer-
ship, please do the following:

Maintenance 1 - Specify your name, address and telephone number.


2 - Provide the model and chassis serial number of the vehicle.
This section of the Manual provides all the maintenance
prescriptions necessary for maintaining the DIECI vehicle in 3 - Indicate the purchase date and working hours.
perfect working condition. 4 - Explain the type of malfunction.

This chapter also provides information on carrying out the Only DIECI Dealers have access to DIECI client service
various maintenance registering necessary to keep the ve- resources. Moreover, Dealers are able to offer a variety of
hicle in optimal condition. The vehicle must receive regular programmes concerning guarantee, fixed rate maintenance
routine maintenance in order to give the best results. It is and safety checks including weight tests, in compliance with
recommended that all services be carried out as prescribed both legal and insurance requirements.
in the service schedule suggested by DIECI. It is the owner’s
and/or user’s responsibility to keep the vehicle in safe work- Preliminary Service Inspection
ing condition and suitable to be driven on the road.
When your new DIECI vehicle has completed 50 service
hours, carefully follow the instructions provided in the chap-
To ensure that the vehicle is well-maintained, contact the ter “GUARANTEE”.
DIECI dealership for an initial inspection within one month of
the vehicle’s purchase or after the first 250 hours of operation.
Periodic scheduled maintenance
Making an inspection appointment in advance is advisable.
A vehicle that is not well-serviced is a threat to the operator and
As seen in the Maintenance Schedule described in the fol-
the people in its vicinity. Ensure that all maintenance work and
lowing pages, many the maintenance interventions must
lubrication is carried out at the intervals indicated in order to
only be carried out by qualified DIECI personnel. Only DIECI
maintain the vehicle in good, safe and efficient working condition.
Dealer maintenance staff has been trained to carry out
these specific interventions and only they have the special
With the exception daily maintenance required, service op-
equipment and tools required to guarantee maximum safety,
erations are based on vehicle operating hours.
precision and efficiency.
Check the counter meter to determine required service
intervals. Do not use the vehicle is maintenance is due.
Spaces for registering periodic inspections can be found at
Ensure that any defects discovered during servicing are im-
the end of this Manual. These allow operators to plan inter-
mediately repaired.
ventions and register them in chronological order. After each
inspection, the Dealer must insert the date of intervention, a
Ensure that all servicing is carried out at the intervals in the
signature and the Dealer stamp in the space.
table on page D5 using only good quality lubricants.
Proper vehicle maintenance not only improves the vehicle
reliability but it also preserves vehicle value over time.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/3
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Carry out servicing at the end of each work day when the RUNNING-IN PERIOD
oils are still warm and can be easily drained.
The operations indicated below must be carried out only
once when the indicated time period has elapsed after the
Before carrying out any service work, switch off the engine, re- new vehicle has been put into service. After this adhere to
move the keys from the dashboard, places wedges under the the intervals specified in the general maintenance schedule.
tyres and apply the provided stoppers to the hydraulic cylinders.
After 10 hours of work:
Before using a grease gun, clean its fittings.
• Check for and eliminate any leaks.
Before removing drain and fuel stoppers, clean the sur- • Check and tighten all hydraulic connections and nuts
rounding area. and bolts.

Always use an appropriate container to collect used oil and fuel. After 50 hours of work:

• Check for and eliminate any leaks.


- ATTENTION - • Check and tighten all hydraulic connections and nuts
and bolts.
If the vehicle is destined for use in critical
• Replace Hydromatic hydraulic oil filters
conditions (dust, mud, sand), maintenance
intervals are reduced by 50%.
After 250 hours of work:

• Replace hydraulic oil return filter.


Safety rules to be followed during maintenance
• Change engine oil.
operations
• Replace engine oil cartridge.
When changing the oil, it is important to follow some funda- • Change naphtha cartridge.
mental personal hygiene rules. Wear protective clothing,
PVC gloves, etc. As soon as the oil has been changed, • Replace hydraulic system oil
wash away, with soap and water, the dirty oil. Dirty clothing
must be removed and washed. Prolonged contact with oil
may have negative health effects.

It is important to follow the above-mentioned instructions.

- Keep hands, tools and clothing away from moving parts.


- Avoid touching the drain tube and collector which may
be hot and cause burns.
- Do not allow inexperienced people near the vehicle.
- Do not work under the vehicle using a jack as the only support.
- Use tripod stands as a precautionary measure.

Protect the environment

It is illegal to pollute sewers, water sources or soil. Only use


authorised collection centres, including the areas designated
by local authorities or workshops equipped with the neces-
sary tools for the collection and disposal of used oils. If in
doubt, contact your local authority for relevant instructions.

- ATTENtION -
Reading and understanding chapters “B”-“C” (Safety
Rules, Getting to know and using the vehicle) is manda-
tory before reading chapter “D”or servicing the vehicle.

D/4 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
DECLARATION OF FIRST INSPECTION

DECLARATION OF FIRST INSPECTION BY


MANUFACTURER

DIECI S.r.l. declares that every vehicle produced in its fac-


tories undergoes static and dynamic inspections before be-
ing placed on the market in order to verify proper operation
and compliance with all relative European directives. After in-
spections are performed, a CE certificate is issued that corre-
sponds to the vehicle inspected and its supplied attachments.

Every CE-marked DIECI product is supplied with its own


certificate, which must be kept by the vehicle’s legitimate
owner in accordance with the law.

DECLARATION OF VIBRATORY EMISSIONS


The declared vibration emission value complies with standard EN 12096

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/5
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

IDENTIFYING THE VEHICLE PARTS


(Hercules 120.10 - 160.10 - 210.10)

Left side of vehicle 16

a
1
2
8 13
7
a

15
5
a

3 12
14

4 4
a

6 11 10 9 6

1. Cab 9. Return hydraulic oil filter


2. Telescopic boom 10. Hydraulic oil tank
3. Attachment holding plate 11. Diesel fuel tank
4. Epicyclic reduction gear 12. Control unit
5. Vehicle levelling cylinder 13. Left rear light
6. Wheel 14. Return hydraulic oil filter
7. Left front light 15. Battery cut-off
8. Battery 16. Working light

Right side of vehicle 14


13
9 12
1 4
9 7
5
10 6 8

3 3

2 2
a

11

1. Right rear light 8. Electric plug boom head


2. Epicyclic reduction gear 9. Radiator
3. Wheel 10. Engine control unit
4. Engine bonnet 11. Gear change
5. Diesel engine 12. Telescopic boom
6. Levelling cylinder 13. Cab
7. Right front light 14. Working light

D/6 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
IDENTIFYING THE VEHICLE PARTS

5
1
5

4 3

Vehicle engine
compartment

1. Air filter 4. Fuse control box


2. Engine 5. Radiator
3. Hydraulic pump

3 4 3

1 2

Rear of vehicle

1. Front axle 3. Transmission shaft


2. Rear axle 4. Gear reducer/shift

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/7
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

MAINTENANCE AND REGISTRATION SCHEDULE

Maintenance operations to be carried out are listed on the left; the graph details the time period in hours and an approximate repre-
*
sentation of the position of the part to be serviced. The asterisk ( ) indicates maintenance in the event of use in special conditions.

*
Check engine oil level

Air filter cleaning

Check water level in radiator

Check radiator is not clogged

Check hydraulic oil level

Check for leaks

After
10 hours *
Draining and cleaning
the diesel fuel tank
Check for leaks
on hydraulic circuit piping
Grease joint pin
Grease jack foot and head
pins for horizontal movement
Grease jack foot
and head pins for lifting
Grease jack foot
and head pins for levelling
Grease articulated pins (PIVOT)
on front and rear wheels.
Greasing steering cylinders
(Hercules160.10 / 210.10)
Grease spiders and cardan
d

joints on transmission shafts


Grease boom sliders
After
50 hours

D/8 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
MAINTENANCE AND REGISTRATION SCHEDULE

Maintenance operations to be carried out are listed on the left; the graph details the time period in hours and an approximate repre-
*
sentation of the position of the part to be serviced. The asterisk ( ) indicates maintenance in the event of use in special conditions.

After
100 hours

Air filter cleaning

Differential axle lubrication

Check tyre pressure

Check all nuts and bolts are tight

Check radiator is not clogged

Check stickers.

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil filter

Replace air filter

Check battery electrolyte level


*
Check electric circuits

Check alternator belt

Tighten wheel nuts

Replace engine oil filter

Replace hydraulic oil d

Replace hydraulic oil return filter

After
250 hours
- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/9
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

MAINTENANCE AND REGISTRATION SCHEDULE

Maintenance operations to be carried out are listed on the left; the graph details the time period in hours and an approximate repre-
*
sentation of the position of the part to be serviced. The asterisk ( ) indicates maintenance in the event of use in special conditions.

Every
100 hours
Air filter cleaning

Check tyre pressure

Check all nuts and bolts are tight

Check radiator is not clogged

Check stickers

Check for leaks

Check engine oil level

Ensure radiator is not clogged


d

Check radiator water level


d

Check battery electrolyte level

Check electric system

Check alternator belt

Tighten wheel nuts

Replace engine oil filter

General vehicle lubrication


d

Every
250 hours
D/10 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
MAINTENANCE AND REGISTRATION SCHEDULE

Maintenance operations to be carried out are listed on the left; the graph details the time period in hours and an approximate repre-
*
sentation of the position of the part to be serviced. The asterisk ( ) indicates maintenance in the event of use in special conditions.

Empty fuel tank

Replace diesel fuel filter

Replace or clean hydraulic oil


suction and return filters

Check oil level in epicycloidal


reduction gear

Check gear change oil level

Check oil level in differential sump

Tighten boom sliders

Clean fuel injection pump filter

Replace engine oil filter d

(see Perkins manual)

Replace engine oil


(see Perkins manual) Every
500 hours

Replace cooling liquid

Replace oil in differential sump

Replace oil level


in epicycloidal reduction gears

Replace gear shift oil

Replace hydraulic system oil

Replace engine air filter


d

Every
1000 hours
- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/11
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Capacity of parts to lubricate


UNIT DESCRIPTION capacitY 120.10 capacitY 160.10 capacitY 210.10
ENGINE OIL lt 9,00 lt 13,00 lt 13,00
OIL ON FRONT WHEEL REDUCERS lt 1,25 lt 4 lt 4
OIL ON rEAR WHEEL REDUCERS lt 1,25 lt 4 lt 4
OIL ON FRONT DIFFERENTIAL AXLE lt 9 lt 20 lt 20
OIL ON REAR DIFFERENTIAL AXLE lt 9 lt 20 lt 20
OIL ON GEARBOX lt 2,5 lt 2,5 lt 2,5
OIL ON LIQUID COOLANT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM lt 340 lt 350 lt 360
COOLANT lt 14,00 lt 20,00 lt 20,00
FUEL FOR TRACTION lt 270 lt 270 lt 270
GREASE kg 2 kg 3 kg 3

COMPARATIVE OIL TABLE

FOR PRODUCT CONSUMPTION AMOUNTS, CONSULT THE CAPACITY OF PARTS TO LUBRICATE IN CHAPTER
“G” (TECHNICAL DATA AND VEHICLE TECHNICAL FEATURES)

DO NOT USE
SYNTHETIC-BASED OIL

D/12 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/13
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

OPENING THE ENGINE BONNET

The engine bonnet (fig. 1/D Pos. “3”) is equipped with an


outer locking handle (fig.1/D Pos.”1”).
To open:
- Insert the key in the lock (fig.1/D Pos.”2”) and turn clock-
wise/counter-clockwise to engage/disengage the lock.
3
- Pull the handle towards you to unhook the bonnet with
the lock disengaged.
NOTE:
The bonnet handle will not open with the lock engaged.

To engage the gas spring lock (fig. 2/D Pos. “1”) to keep the
engine bonnet open.
- Push the bonnet up as far as it will go.
- Activation of the gas spring is indicated by a click. Gradu-
ally and slowly lower the bonnet in order to ensure that the (fig.1/D) 2
lock is properly engaged and that it holds the bonnet open.
1
To release the engine bonnet:
- Gently raise up the bonnet with one hand, and holding it
in this position, push the red button located on the gas
spring (fig. 2/D Pos. “2”) using the other hand.
- Hold the bonnet during closing so that it does not abrupt-
ly slam shut.

- ATTENTION:
Do not allow the engine bonnet to slam down abruptly
in order to avoid hurting the operator. Do not bang the
bonnet shut as this could cause damage to it.

- PROHIBITED -
Operating the vehicle with the bonnet open
IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
At the end of maintenance operations,
the bonnet must always be locked closed.
2

(fig.2/D)

D/14 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ENGINE
FOR ENGINE, AIR FILTER, and FUEL FILTER mainte-
nance ETC. carefully follow THE MANUFAC-
TURER’S INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED IN THE special- Operation and
ly included HANDBOOK.
Maintenance Manual
THE ENGINE USE AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK IS
AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE DOCUMENTATION SUP-
PLIED WITH THE VEHICLE.

(fig.3/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/15
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

PEDALS

Accelerator
(fig.4/D Pos.”1”)

The accelerator is an electronic accelerator and as such it


does not require ordinary maintenance.

Brakes
(fig.4/D Pos.”2”)
3 2 1
- ATTENTION: (fig.4/D)
If the brake pedal seems too ‘elastic’, contact your DIECI
dealer to have this fault corrected.

- ATTENTION:
Periodically check the condition of all brake pipes and tubes.
A significant level lowering is an indication of a system leak.
Contact your DIECI dealer to replace all damaged, corroded
or worn tubes.

Hydrostatic Engine (Inching) Control


(fig.4/D Pos.”1”)

The pedal does not require adjustment because it is directly


in contact with the inching valve that hydraulically controls
the movement of the hydrostatic pump.

D/16 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
PARKING BRAKE
(fig.7/D pos.”1”)

The electrically controlled parking brake does not need ordi-


nary maintenance.

- ATTENTION:
If the brake is not effective, contact your DIECI dealer to
have this fault corrected.

The switching on of the “A” pilot light (fig, 8/D) indicates low pres-
sure in the brake system. In these conditions, the brake is not
able to function properly, compromising the safety of the vehicle.

When a pilot light switches on:


- Stop working
- Bring the machine to a halt on flat ground.
- Switch off the vehicle and place wedges under the wheels.
- Identify the problem 1
Go to an authorized DIECI service centre to resolve the problem.

(fig.7/D)
- PROHIBITED -
OPERATING THE VEHICLE WITH A DAMAGED
PARKING BRAKEIS STRICTLY PROHIBITED

(fig.8/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/17
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Level of hydraulic OIL


(Fig.9/D Pos.”1”)

The hydraulic oil tank is located under the driver’s cab (fig,
9/D Pos. “1”)
The oil level can be check via the transparent cap located
on the side of the tank itself (fig. 9/D Pos “2”)
The level is correct when the oil can be seen through the
transparent cap with all vehicle cylinders in transport position.

To correctly check the level:


- Park the vehicle on a level surface.
- Retract the boom completely and lower it.
- Position cylinders in transport mode. 1
- Switch off the engine.
‑ Check the oil level on the transparent indicator (fig.9/D Pos.”2”).

If the oil level is not correct: (fig.9/D)


- Open the compartment behind the cab (fig. 10/D Pos “1”)
- Remove the top up cap (fig.10/D Pos.”2”) and pour in
the DIECI recommended oil. Top up the quantity neces-
sary to bring it back to level.

Routine maintenance should be carried out at the prescribed


intervals. (page D/9-10-11). 2
- ATTENTION:
When topping up, do not exceed level and immediately
clean any spillage.

(fig.10/D)

D/18 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Changing hydraulic oil and replacing oil filters
(Suction and return filters)

Consult the Summary Table at the start of the chapter for 4


service deadlines (page D/9-10-11).

Three mesh filters (fig.11/D Pos.”1”) are present inside the 5


tank. These prevent any hazardous particles from entering
the hydraulic system. Replacing hydraulic oil, the internal
tank filter and the hydrostatic filter must be done together. It
is not possible to replace only one of the components.
To correctly change oil and filters:
- Bring the machine to a halt on flat ground.
- Retract the boom and lower it completely and position
the cylinders in transport mode.
- Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
1
- Place a suitable capacity container under the drain plug. 1
1
- Remove the drain plug (fig.11/D Pos.”2”) to drain oil. Remove
the loading plug (fig.11/D Pos.”3”) to accelerate drainage.
- When the tank is completely empty, replace the return
filter following these instructions:
- Remove the flange (fig. 11/D Pos. “5”) to easily access
the inside of the tank.
- Use a key fork to remove the filters (fig.11/D Pos.”1”) in- 2
side the tank.
- Insert new filters, tightening them with the screw spanner. (fig.11/D)
- Put back the filter after having substituted the cartridge
(fig. 11/D Pos. “4”) in its housing, locking down the bolts.
- Re-insert the drain plug (fig.11/D Pos.”2”).
- Fill up the tank to level desired using its top up cap
3
(fig.11/D Pos.”3”).
- Start up the vehicle and move the hydraulic cylinders to
discharge any air bubbles.
- Check the hydraulic oil level again and top up if necessary.

- ATTENTION:
Waste oil is potentially harmful to the environment and must
be disposed of appropriately.

Changing the Hydraulic oil return filter


2 1
- Remove the cover (fig, 12/D Pos. “1”) unscrewing the four 3
screws (fig. 12/D Pos. “2”) Take care in doing this as the
internal spring pushes the cover towards the outside.
- Remove the internal filter cartridge (fig, 12/D Pos. “4”) and
substitute in with a new one. Remove the spring (fig. 12/D
Pos “3”) from the worn cartridge and insert a new one.
- Insert the new cartridge in its housing; the spring must be
in the upper part of the cartridge (fig. 12/D).
- Put back the cover being careful to keep the spring in the
4
correct position. Completely lock the cover and ensure that
there are no leaks.

(fig.12/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/19
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Hydrostatic System filters


(fig.13/D pos.”1”)

Operate as follows to correctly replace:

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.

2. Retract the boom and lower it completely and position 2


the cylinders in transport mode.
1
3. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.

4. Place a container under the filter to collect any oil which


may come out during replacement. 1
5. Close the slide valve (13/D pos “2” to avoid emptying the tank.

6. Remove the filter cartridges (fig. 13/D Pos. “1”) one at a


time, unscrewing them with a ribbon spanner (fig. 14/D).

7. Clean the filter supports with a clean cloth that will not leave
marks, making sure the old sealing rings are removed. (fig.13/D)

8. Fill the new filters with hydraulic oil approved by DIECI.


Lubricate with the same oil used on the oil seal gasket.

9. Screw in the filters using only your hands, paying careful


attention to the correct positioning of the gaskets lubri-
cated previously.

10. Switch on the vehicle and make sure there are no leaks.

- ATTENTION:
Waste oil is potentially harmful to the environment and
must always be disposed of appropriately.

(fig.14/D)

D/20 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
FUEL TANK
(Fig.15/D Pos.”1”)

Opening/Closing

To open the tank, turn the cp (fig. 15D/Pos. “2”) counter


clockwise. To close it, turn it clockwise until it clicks, indicat-
ing its complete closure. The tank cap is a key-like cap. In- 2
sert the key in the lock (fig.16/D Pos.”1”) and turn clockwise/
counter-clockwise to engage/disengage the lock. With the
lock engaged, the cap cannot be removed.

Cleaning

For correct cleaning:


1
3
1. Stop the vehicle on a flat, level surface.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Place a container of suitable capacity under the drain (fig.15/D)
plugs (fig.15/D Pos.”3”) to collect fuel that may come out
during cleaning.
4. Unscrew the tank top up cap (fig.15/D Pos.”2”).
5. Unscrew the tank drain plug (fig.15/D Pos.”3”).
6. Let fuel drain, then top up ten litres of clean fuel through
the top up opening to eliminate any residual impurities.
7. Replace the drain plug and tighten it securely. 1
8. Top up the tank with clean fuel and replace cap.

- ATTENtION -
Fuel is highly inflammable.

Do not smoke and do not approach the vehicle


with an open flame during these operations. (fig.16/D)

Risk of fire or explosion.

- ATTENtION -
Waste fuel is potentially harmful to the environment
and must be disposed of appropriately.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/21
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

engine radiator and services


(Fig.20/D Pos.”1”)

- ATTENTION - 1
1
These operations must be carried out when the engine is cold.

Radiator grill cleaning

The radiator grill (fig. 20/D Pos. “1”) must be kept as clean
as possible in order to facilitate a better heat exchange be-
tween this and the air circulating within it. To remove impuri-
ties, use a low pressure air jet from the outside towards the
inside of the radiator, that is, from the air outlet towards the
engine. Then pass the air jet over the dirty, internal parts of
the engine compartment. If the dirt is particularly compact,
soften it with a low pressure water jet before using air. (fig.20/D)
Keep the engine bonnet grills clean to facilitate air circulation with-
in the engine compartment (fig. 21/D Pos. “1”) and the vents (fig.
21/D Pos. “2”), following the same instructions as for the radiator.

- ATTENTION:
Consult the engine operation and maintenance handbook
before using jets of air or water.
1 1
1
- ATTENTION:
Heat exchange flaps are very delicate. Do not use rags or brush-
es to clean. Jets of water and air must be directed horizontally.

Check cooling liquid level

During normal vehicle use, the water level should be


kept at 3 cm under the radiator cap (fig.21/D Pos.”1”).
Verification of a correct level of cooling liquid must be carri- 2
ed out as follows:
1. Stop the vehicle on a flat, level surface.
(fig.21/D) 2
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Slowly turn the radiator cap (fig.22/D Pos.”1”) counter-
clockwise until reaching the safety pin.
4. Discharge pressure and steam.
5. Turn the cap counter clockwise and remove it.
6. Check the coolant level. If necessary, top up with a mix of 2
water and antifreeze. The level is correct when the tank is
completely full (3cm below the radiator) (fig. 22/D Pos. “2”).
7. To reinsert the cap carry out the operations in the oppo-
site order.

- ATTENTION:
If frequent top ups are necessary in normal working condi-
tions, verify that there are no cooling system leaks. Contact
a DIECI service centre if problems arise.

- ATTENTION:
Use demineralised water to fill the cooling system. Calcareous wa- 1
ter may cause incrustations and premature aging of the system.

(fig.22/D)

D/22 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Replacing cooling liquid
For correct replacement of cooling liquid:
1. Stop the vehicle on a flat surface.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Open and lock the bonnet.
4. Remove engine compartment cinch (fig. 24/D Pos “1”)
unscrewing the screw (fig. 24/D).
5. Place a container under the radiator to collect any cool-
ing liquid which may come out during replacement.
7. Remove the sleeve (fig. 23/D Pos. “1”) to drain the water
in the radiator; unscrew the top up cap (fig. 22/D Pos.
“1”) to accelerate draining.
8. Allow the cooling circuit to drain completely.
9. Check the conditions of the sleeves and their fastenings.
Replace if necessary.
10. Wash the radiator with clean water, pouring it into the
top up cap (fig.22/D Pos.”1”) and draining it through the
sleeve inlet (fig.23/D Pos.”1”). If necessary, add a deter-
gent product to the clean water.
11. Once clean, close the drain inlet replacing the sleeve
(fig.23/D Pos.”1”).
12. Fill up the cooling system with the cap (fig.22/D Pos.”2”)
up to level (3 cm below the radiator cap) with the previ-
ously prepared cooling liquid. 1
13. Close the cap (fig.22/D Pos.”1”) and switch on the en-
gine and allow it run at minimum for a few minutes.
14. Make sure that there are no leaks, check the level and, if
necessary, add more liquid.
15. Once operations have been completed reinsert the cap
and close the engine bonnet.
(fig.23/D)
- ATTENTION -
Use demineralized water to fill the cooling system.
Calcareous water may cause incrustations
and premature aging of the system.

- ATTENTION:
Always wear suitable protective clothing during these operations.

- ATTENTION:
Waste coolant is potentially harmful to the environment and
must be disposed of appropriately.

- ATTENTION -
The radiator must always be filled with a solution
made of distilled water and antifreeze to prevent
the rusting and freezing of system water.
Mixing percentages can
be found on antifreeze containers.

1
(fig.24/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/23
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Air filter
(Fig.27/D Pos.”1”)

Cartridge Cleaning / Replacement


1
An air filter in poor conditions can cause a reduction in pow-
er, excessive fuel consumption and shorten engine life.
Filter clogging is signalled by the corresponding pilot light
found on the central dashboard. It is possible to continue
operation for a maximum of 10 hours after clogging has
been signalled. Maintenance must however be carried out
as often as described.
Filter cleaning should be carried out with compressed air at
2
maximum of 3 Bar and at a distance not less than 150mm,
(fig.27/D)
taking due caution to not damage components.

Use a wet cloth which will not leave residue to clean the box
and cover.
For correct cleaning:
1. Stop the vehicle on a flat, level surface.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Open and lock the bonnet.
4. Pull the locking levers (fig.28/D Pos.”1”), located on the four 1
corners of the filter cover (fig.27/D Pos.”2”), towards you.
5. Remove the cover (fig.27/D Pos.”2”).
6. Push the inside handle (fig.29/D Pos.”1”) towards the en-
gine (as indicated by the arrows) and pull it towards you
to extract the secondary filter.
7. Slide the paper filter (fig.30/D Pos.”1”) from the support,
(fig.28/D)
overturning downward the part equipped with a gasket. Keep
one hand under it to prevent it from falling and being ruined.
8. Remove the primary filter (fig.31/D Pos.”1”), pulling the
extraction flap toward the (fig.31/D Pos.”2”) side or the
central plastic (fig.31/D Pos.”3”).
9. Clean and replace filters and remount them following the 1
same instructions in the opposite order.

- ATTENTION:
We recommend cleaning filters only when the pilot light sig-
nals clogging or at scheduled maintenance intervals. Unnec-
essary and too frequent cleaning exposes components to (fig.29/D)
handling damage which can allow dust and dirt to pass into
the filtering phases, causing damage to the engine.

- ATTENTION:
Filtration components which come into contact with any type
of liquid will have to be replaced.

Regularly check the suction sleeves and replace them imme-


diately if worn or damaged. Regularly check that bolts and
clamps are properly tightened. No air should be allowed to 1
enter the engine without having first passed through the filter. (fig.30/D)

D/24 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
During filter cartridge replacement, clean the primary suction
duct and the filter holding plate.

Follow the operations listed below:


2
1. Remove the front filter bolt (fig.34/D Pos.”1”) and remove 3
the air input inlet (fig.34/D Pos.”2”).
2. Use a wet cloth that will not leave residue. Clean every
air input inlet. (fig.31/D) 1
3. Repeat the same operations in the opposite order to re-
mount all components.
2
- ATTENTION:
In the event the gasket is worn, replace it.

- ATTENTION: 1
Do not operate with an improperly assembled or damaged filter.

- ATTENTION:
To ensure maximum filter efficiency, we recommend oper-
ating with a complete filter on both parts and components. (fig.34/D)
All worn parts should be replaced as quickly as possible.

- PROHIBITED -
Operating the vehicle without an engine air filter is
ABSOLUTELY PROHIBITED

The engine constantly sucks up air during use;


the dust present causes severe system damage.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/25
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

CYLINDER BLOCK VALVES

Cylinder block valves hinder uncontrolled movement of the cylin-


der pistons in case of lacking hydraulic or bursting pressure of a
flexible pipe. The valves are directly mounted on the cylinders.

Cylinder non return valves check

- ATTENTION:
Whenever these checks take place do not allow anybody
near the vehicle.

- ATTENTION:
One movement at a time should be checked during verifications.

- ATTENTION:
In the event of malfunction, do not use the vehicle until it has
been repaired.

A) Boom raising cylinders: (fig.43/D)

1. Start up the engine. Make sure that the parking brake is


engaged and the transmission in neutral.
2. Lift the boom to a 45° angle.
3. When the engine is running at 1400 RPMs, engage the
control lever to lower the boom. During the boom move- (Fig.43/D) (Boom raising cylinder block valve)
ment stop the engine. The boom must slow down and
stop as the engine slows down and stops.

If the boom keeps on moving after the motor stops, the


boom raising cylinders are faulty. Repair the defect as
quickly as possible, contact a DIECI service centre.

B) Boom extension cylinder: (fig.44)

1. Start up the engine. Make sure that the parking brake is


engaged and the transmission in neutral.
2. Raise the boom and extend it completely.
3. When the engine is running at 1400 RPMs, engage
the control lever to retract the boom. During the boom (Fig.44/D) (Boom raising cylinder block valve)
movement stop the engine. The boom must slow down
and stop as the engine slows down and stops.

If the boom keeps on moving after the engine is switched


off, the block valve is faulty. Repair the defect as quickly as
possible, contact a DIECI service centre.

D/26 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
C) Forks swivelling cylinder (swivelling): (fig.44/D)

1. Start up the engine; pick up a load using the forks


(example a load bricks or hay bales).
Tilt the forks completely backwards.
2. Engage the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
3. Shift the boom away from the ground as much as need-
ed to allow the forks forward inclination.
4. When the engine is running at 1400 RPMs, engage the (Fig.46/D) (Outer swivel plate cylinder block valve)
control lever to tilt the forks forward. During the fork move-
ment stop the engine. Swivelling movement must slow
down and then stop as the engine slows down and stops.

If the forks keep lowering or move after the engine is


switched off, the block valve is faulty. Repair the defect as
quickly as possible, contact a DIECI service centre.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/27
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

REDUCERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AXLES

Figures illustrated are only an indication and may not corre-


spond to those parts mounted on your vehicle.
The maintenance openings are referred to in the follow-
ing pages where the technical drawings of the standard
axles with reducers are shown.

Reducer

Changing the oil


(Fig.53/D)
1. Stop the vehicle on a flat, level surface with differential
oil still hot.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Place a container under the drain plugs to collect any oil F
which may come out during replacement.
4. Remove the drain plug (fig.53/D Pos.”G”) and the loading/ G
level plug (fig.53/D Pos.”F”) to carry out a complete drainage.
5. Allow the oil to completely drain out.
6. Replace the drain plugs and tighten them securely.
7. Pour an approved type of clean oil into the loading/level
plug (fig.53/D Pos.”F”). (fig.53/D)
8. The level is correct when oil comes out of the loading/
level plug (fig.53/D Pos.”F”).
9. Check for any leaks coming from the drain plugs.
10. Replace the drain/level plug and tighten it securely.

Front/Rear Differential Axles 120.10

Changing the oil


(Fig.54/D)
1. Stop the vehicle on a flat, level surface with differential
oil still hot.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
F
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Place a container under the drain plugs to collect any oil
which may come out during replacement. G
4. Remove the drain plug (fig.54/D Pos.”G”) and the loading/
level plug (fig.54/D Pos.”F”) to carry out a complete drainage.
5. Allow the oil to completely drain out.
6. Replace the drain plugs and tighten them securely.
7. Pour an approved type of clean oil into the loading/level
plug (fig.54/D Pos.”F”).
8. The level is correct when oil comes out of the loading/ (fig.54/D)
level plug (fig.54/D Pos.”F”).
9. Check for any leaks coming from the drain plugs.
10. Replace the drain/level plug and tighten it securely.

D/28 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Front/Rear Differential Axles 160.10-210.10

Changing the oil


(Fig.54/D)

1. Stop the vehicle on a flat, level surface with differential oil


still hot.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Place a container under the drain plugs to collect any oil
which may come out during replacement.
4. Remove the drain plug (fig.54/D Pos.”G”) and the loading/
level plug (fig.54/D Pos.”F”) to carry out a complete drain-
age.
5. Allow the oil to completely drain out.
6. Replace the drain plugs and tighten them securely.
7. Pour an approved type of clean oil into the loading/level
plug (fig.54/D Pos.”F”).
8. The level is correct when oil comes out of the loading/level
plug (fig.54/D Pos.”F”).
9. Check for any leaks coming from the drain plugs.
10. Replace the drain/level plug and tighten it securely.

Epicyclic reduction gear

Changing the oil


(Fig.55/D - fig.56/D - fig.57/D) 1
1. Stop the vehicle on a flat, level surface with differential oil
still hot.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key, hang up
a sign in the cab that reads “maintenance work under way”.
3. Place a container under the drain plugs to collect any oil M
which may come out during replacement.
3. Turn the wheel hub (fig.55/D Pos.”1”) in such a way that the
opening (fig.55/D Pos.”M”) is moved to the lower position
(fig.54/D), and then remove the oil cap.
4. Allow the oil to completely drain out.
5. Turn the wheel hub so that the opening (fig.55/D Pos.”M”)
(fig.55/D)
is moved to the middle position (fig.57/D).
6. Fill the reduction gear to level from the opening (fig.57/D).
The level is correct when oil comes out from the oil cap.
7. Replace the epicycloidal reduction gear cap and tighten it
securely.
8. Repeat all the operations for each of the four reducer units. M
M

(fig.56/D) (fig.57/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/29
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Key

REDUCERS 120.10 - 160.10 E Oil level cap

F Loading plugs and oil level

G Drain plug

H Vent cap

M Oil cap

(fig.58/D)

D/30 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Key

DIFFERENTIAL AXLE 120.10 E Oil level cap

F Loading plugs and oil level

G Drain plug

H Vent cap

M Oil cap

h h

M f
E

M
(fig.59/D) G
- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/31
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Key

REDUCER 210.10 E Oil level cap

F Loading plugs and oil level

G Drain plug

H Vent cap

M Oil cap

(fig.60/D)

D/32 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Key

DIFFERENTIAL AXLE 160.10 - 210.10 E Oil level cap

F Loading plugs and oil level

G Drain plug

H Vent cap

M Oil cap

(fig.61/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/33
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

D/34 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
boom sliding blocks

Greasing
(Fig.62/D)

Boom sliding blocks must be kept lubricated to prevent dete- - ATTENTION:


rioration as much as possible and keep movements smooth.
If the vehicle is used in particularly taxing conditions or very
Extend the boom completely and examine its surface. dusty environments, grease it more frequently.
In the event that the layer of grease is thin or presents impu-
rities (sand, dust, shavings, etc.) proceed as follows:
- ATTENTION:
- With the boom completely extended horizontally, remove the Only use lubricants indicated in DIECI tables. Different lubri-
layer of grease from the extension surfaces using a cloth. cants can cause serious damage to sliding surfaces.
- Use a brush to spread a layer of an approved type of
grease on the four sides of the telescopic boom.
Sliding block wear
- Move the boom several times to distribute the grease evenly.
- Remove any excess grease. Consult the Summary Table at the start of the chapter for
servicing intervals.

- ATTENTION - Sliding block wear can cause oscillations and slack between
extensions causing a loss of precision in movements and
During this phase of visual inspection and spreading of the risk of load loss. The more difficult the working condi-
grease the vehicle must be switched off and the key re- tions, the greater the wear and tear on the vehicle.
moved from the cab to prevent accidental manoeuvres. Boom sliding block maintenance must be carried out by an
authorized workshop.

(fig.62/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/35
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Oilers

Left side of vehicle


(fig.71/D)

Right side of vehicle


(fig.72/D)

D/36 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Oilers
Single extension telescopic booms

(fig.76/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/37
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Oilers 120.10
Transmission shafts and differential axles

Rear transmission shaft Front transmission shaft

Differential axle

Epicyclic reduction gear

(fig.77/D)

D/38 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
oilers 160.10-210.10
Transmission shafts and differential axles

Rear transmission shaft Front transmission shaft

Differential axle

(fig.77/D)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/39
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

battery isolator switch


(Fig.78/D Pos.”1”)

The battery isolator switch is located under the cab next to


the battery. Its function is to cut off power to the electrical 4
system, opening the circuit on the negative pole.

- Turn the handle bringing it the horizontal position in or-


der to open the circuit and switch off the electric power.
(Fig. 79/D Pos. “1”).

- Turn the handle, bringing it to the vertical position in


order to reset starting conditions and close the circuit
(fig.78/D Pos.”1”) .
3
2
- ATTENtION -
1
The battery isolator switch must only
be used when the vehicle switched off.

- ATTENtION -
Use the battery cut-off to open the electrical
circuit each time the vehicle is serviced.

(fig.78/D)
Battery extraction
(Fig.78/D Pos.”3”)

To extract the battery:


- Unscrew pin “2” (fig. 78/D);
- Draw the support towards you by turning handle “3” (fig.
78/D) and slinging it along its runners.
- Carry out the same operations in the opposite order to
reinsert the battery in its original position (fig. 78/D).

- ATTENTION:
Only operate when the battery is correctly positioned in
itscompartmentandwhenthesupportislockedbyitspin.

- ATTENTION:
The battery can only be extracted after the circuit has
been opened via the battery isolator switch.

(fig.79/D)

D/40 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
fuses
(Fig.80/D Pos.”1”)

General control box

The general electric circuit is protected by fuses located on


the general electronic card (fig.80/D Pos.”1”). Access the elec-
tronic card by removing the plastic left under the dashboard,
removing its screws. In the event of an electrical malfunction,
fuse conditions must be verified as the first troubleshoot-
ing operation. Fuses must be removed with special pliers. 1
To replace a fuse, remove it from its housing using special
pliers and replace it with another fuse of equal class, quality
and amperage.

- ATTENTION:
Before removing the plastics under the dashboard, cut off
electrical power to the vehicle using the battery cut-off.

- ATTENTION:
Do not attempt to repair fuses.

(fig.80/D)

Engine control unit


(Fig.81/D Pos.”1”)

Engine electrical circuits and connected components are


protected by a fuse control box located within the engine
compartment (fig. 81/D Pos.”1”).
Remove the box cover to access the fuses.
In the event of an electrical malfunction, fuse conditions
must be verified as the first troubleshooting operation.

To replace a fuse, remove it from its housing using special


pliers and replace it with another fuse of equal class, quality
and amperage. All other operations must be carried out by
qualified personnel only.
1
- ATTENTION:
Before accessing the engine compartment, switch off the
vehicle and remove the ignition key, then, cut off electrical
power to the vehicle using the battery cut-off.

- ATTENTION:
Do not attempt to repair fuses.
(fig.81/D)
- ATTENtION -
The general fuse is located inside the engine control box.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/41
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

Lighting

Vehicle lighting must always be efficient and functioning


properly. Function must be checked every day. In case of
damage to the lighting body, replace the damaged part im-
mediately. Burnt light bulbs should be replaced immediately.

FRONT LIGHT
(Fig.82/D)

The front light is composed of a direction indicator, a posi- (fig.82/D)


tion light, dipped light/headlight.

To access bulbs:
- Switch off the vehicle and use the battery cut-off to
switch off electrical power.
- Remove the light power connection at the rear.
- Remove the front part of the light by removing its screws
located in the rear cap.
To close the light back up, operate in the opposite order, tak-
ing due care of the correct positioning of the seal. 1
(fig.83/D)
Replacing a direction indicator bulb
(Fig.83/D Pos.”1”) (21w)
- Press the upper part of the bulb.
- Turn the bulb while holding it down, to free it from the lock. 2
Carry out the same operations to insert a new bulb.

Replacing a position light bulb


(Fig.84/D Pos.”1”) (4w)
- Hold the rear part where the electrical connections are
located (fig.84/D Pos.”2”).
- Turn and pull the rear part towards you. 1
- Remove the support and press the upper part of the bulb.
- Turn the bulb while holding it down, to free it from the lock.
Carry out the same operations to insert a new bulb. Re-
place the support inside its housing.

Replacing a dipped light/headlight bulb (fig.84/D)


(Fig.85/D Pos.”1”) (60/55w H4)
- Remove the electrical connector by pulling it towards you.
- Raise the locking tab (fig.85/D Pos.”2”), moving it later-
ally to free the bulb.
- Replace the bulb and proceed in the opposite order to
lock and reconnect it. Respect bulb closing mechanisms 3 C
3
(fig.85/D Pos.”3”) for proper insertion.
2
- ATTENTION -
2
The bulbs are very fragile. Handle them with care. 1
Dimmed headlight bulbs must not
be managed with bare hands.
3

(fig.85/D)

D/42 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
REAR LIGHT
(fig.86/D)

The rear light is composed of a reverse light (21W) (fig.89/D


Pos.”1”), rear red light (5W) (fig.89/D Pos.”2”), the stop light
(21W) (fig.89/D Pos.”3”), a direction indicator (21W) (fig.89/D
Pos.”4”), and a rear fog light (21W) (fig.89/D Pos.”5”).
1 3
To access bulbs:
- Switch off the vehicle and use the battery cut-off to
switch off electrical power. 2
- Remove the light power connection at the rear.
- Remove the front part of the light by removing its screws
located on the cap. 5 4
- ATTENTION: (fig.86/D)
To close the light back up, operate in the opposite order, tak-
ing due care of the correct positioning of the seal.

Replacing the rear light bulb.


- Press the upper part of the bulb.
- Turn the bulb while holding it down, to free it from the lock. 2
Carry out the same operation in the opposite order to insert
a new bulb.
1
WORKING LIGHT
(Fig.87/D)

Replacing bulbs
(fig.89/D Pos.”1”) (special bulb) (fig.87/D) (fig.88/D)
- Switch off the vehicle and use the battery cut-off to
switch off electrical power.
- Remove the power connector of the light in the rear part
(fig.88/D Pos.”1”).
- Press the connector grip on the light (fig. 88/D Pos.”2”).
- Turn the grip, keeping it pressed down, to release.
1
Carry out the same operation in the opposite order to insert (fig.89/D)
a new bulb.

DUAL REFLECTOR WORKING LIGHT


(Fig.90/D) 2
Replacing bulbs
2
(Fig.91/D Pos.”1”) (Type 21w H3)
- Switch off the vehicle and use the battery cut-off to
switch off electrical power.
- Remove the screws on the front part of the light. (fig.90/D)
- Remove the bulb power connectors (fig.91/D Pos.”2”). 4
3
- Move the locking tabs, bringing them towards the inside
to release them (fig.91/D Pos.”3”). 3 4
Carry out the same operation in the opposite order to insert
a new bulb. Treat the bulb closing mechanisms with care 1 (fig.91/D)
(fig.91/D Pos.”4”) for proper insertion.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/43
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

PRELOAD AND TORQUE TABLE


FOR CLASS 1 NUTS AND BOLTS

Categories of fine pitch bolts and nuts


Coefficient of

4.8 5.8 6.8 8.8 10.9 12.9


friction

M
Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque
couple couple couple couple couple couple
N Nm N Nm N Nm N Nm N Nm N Nm
0.10 9798.1 10.87 12247.6 13.59 14697.1 16.31 19596.1 21.75 27557.1 30.58 33068.5 36.70
M8 0.14 9079.5 13.53 11349.4 16.91 13619.3 20.29 18159.1 27.05 25536.2 38.04 30643.4 45.65

0.10 15296.9 21.13 19121.1 26.41 22945.3 31.69 30593.8 42.25 43022.5 59.42 51627.0 71.30
M10 0.14 14175.0 26.27 17718.8 32.84 21262.6 39.41 28350.1 52.55 39867.3 73.89 47840.8 88.67

0.10 22020.7 35.83 27525.9 44.79 33031.0 53.75 44041.4 71.67 61933.2 100.78 74319.8 120.94
M12 0.14 20405.8 44.53 25507.2 55.66 30608.7 66.79 40811.6 89.06 57391.3 125.24 68869.5 150.29

0.10 31610.0 59.04 39512.5 73.80 47415.0 88.57 63220.0 118.09 88903.1 166.06 106683.7 199.27
M14 0.14 29345.9 73.92 36682.4 92.40 44018.9 110.89 58691.9 147.85 82535.4 207.91 99042.5 249.49

0.10 42581.3 89.78 53226.6 112.23 63871.9 134.67 85162.5 179.56 119759.8 252.51 143711.8 303.02
M16 0.14 39587.8 113.06 49484.7 141.32 59381.6 169.59 79175.5 226.12 111340.6 317.98 133608.7 381.57

0.10 51457.2 124.03 64321.5 155.03 77185.8 186.04 102914.4 248.06 144723.3 348.83 173668.0 418.59
M18 0.14 47751.7 155.02 59689.6 193.78 71627.5 232.53 95503.3 310.05 134301.6 436.00 161161.9 523.20

0.10 65534.1 173.72 81917.7 217.16 98301.2 260.59 131068.3 347.45 184314.8 488.60 221177.8 586.32
M20 0.14 60886.2 218.17 76107.8 272.71 91329.3 327.26 121772.4 436.34 171242.5 613.61 205491.0 736.33

0.10 81220.8 236.88 101526.0 296.10 121831.2 355.32 162441.5 473.76 228433.4 666.23 274120.1 799.48
M22 0.14 75533.9 298.75 94417.4 373.43 113300.9 448.12 151067.8 597.49 212439.1 840.22 254927.0 1008.27

0.10 98515.6 308.56 123144.5 385.70 147773.4 462.84 197031.1 617.12 277075.0 867.83 332490.0 1041.40
M24 0.14 91693.3 390.33 114616.6 487.92 137539.9 585.50 183386.5 780.67 257887.3 1097.82 309464.8 1317.38

D/44 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
PRELOAD AND TORQUE COUPLE TABLE
FOR CLASS 2 NUTS AND BOLTS

Categories of wide pitch nuts and bolts


Coefficient of

4.8 5.8 6.8 8.8 10.9 12.9


friction

M
Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque Preload Torque
couple couple couple couple couple couple
N Nm N Nm N Nm N Nm N Nm N Nm

0.10 4874.7 4.24 6093.4 5.30 7312.1 6.35 9749.4 8.47 13710.1 11.92 16452.2 14.30
M6 0.14 4499.1 5.19 5623.9 6.48 6748.6 7.78 8998.2 10.37 12653.7 14.59 15184.4 17.51

0.10 7134.5 6.97 8918.2 8.71 10701.8 10.45 14269.1 13.94 20065.9 19.60 24079.1 23.52
M7 0.14 6599.6 8.60 8249.5 10.76 9899.4 12.90 13199.2 17.21 18561.4 24.20 22273.6 29.04

0.10 8947.1 10.20 11183.9 12.75 13420.7 15.30 17894.2 20.41 25163.7 28.70 30196.5 34.44
M8 0.14 8265.6 12.54 10332.0 15.67 12398.4 18.80 16531.2 25.07 23247.0 35.26 27896.5 42.31

0.10 14244.5 20.11 17805.6 25.14 21366.8 30.16 28489.0 40.22 40062.7 56.56 48075.3 67.87
M10 0.14 13167.4 24.76 16459.2 30.95 19751.1 31.14 26334.8 49.52 37033.3 69.64 44439.9 83.56

0.10 20766.6 34.43 25958.3 43.03 31149.9 51.64 41533.2 68.86 58406.1 96.83 70087.3 116.20
M12 0.14 19204.0 42.42 24005.0 53.03 28806.0 63.63 38408.0 84.84 54011.2 119.31 64813.5 143.17

0.10 28389.9 54.77 35487.4 68.46 42584.9 82.15 56779.8 109.53 79846.6 154.03 95816.0 184.84
M14 0.14 26261.2 67.56 32826.5 84.45 39391.8 101.34 52522.4 135.13 73859.6 190.02 88631.5 228.03

0.10 39242.1 85.14 49052.7 106.43 58863.2 127.72 78484.3 170.29 110368.5 239.47 132442.2 287.36
M16 0.14 36364.2 105.80 45455.3 132.26 54546.3 158.71 72728.5 211.61 102274.4 297.58 122729.3 357.09

0.10 47533.0 117.48 59416.3 146.85 71299.6 176.22 95066.1 234.96 133686.7 330.41 160424.1 396.49
M18 0.14 43986.1 145.16 54982.7 181.45 65979.2 217.74 87972.3 290.32 123711.0 402.26 148453.2 489.92

0.10 61238.0 166.08 76547.5 207.61 91857.0 249.13 122476.0 332.17 172231.9 467.11 206678.2 560.54
M20 0.14 56747.1 206.39 70933.9 257.98 85120.6 309.58 113494.2 412.78 159601.2 580.47 191521.5 696.56

0.10 76305.2 227.22 95381.5 284.02 114457.8 340.82 152610.4 454.43 214608.3 639.05 257530.0 766.85
M22 0.14 70791.9 283.79 88489.8 352.74 106187.8 425.69 141583.7 567.58 199102.1 798.16 238922.5 957.80

0.10 88232.4 287.16 110290.5 358.94 132348.6 430.73 176464.9 574.31 248153.7 807.63 297784.4 969.15
M24 0.14 81761.8 356.84 102202.2 446.05 122642.7 535.26 163523.6 713.68 229955.1 1003.61 275946.1 1204.33

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/45
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

TORQUE TABLE OF HYDRAULIC FITTINGS

60° spinner inserts - BSP thread


THREADING 1/18-28 1/4-19 3/8-19 1/2-14 5/8-14 3/4-14 1”-11 1”1/4-11 1”1/2-11

N.m 12-14 14-16 25-28 45-60 55-70 90-110 120-140 170-190 200-245

60° spinner inserts - METRIC thread


THREADING 10x1 12x1,5 14x1,5 16x1,5 18x1,5 22x1,5 26x1,5 28x1,5 30x1,5

N.m 12-14 13-15 15-18 25-28 27-30 50-60 60-75 80-100 110-130

DIN SERIES FITTINGS / RANGE “L”


THREADING 12x1,5 14x1,5 16x1,5 18x1,5 22x1,5 26x1,5 30x2 36x1,5 45x1,5 52x1,5

N.m 13-15 15-18 25-28 27-30 50-60 30-75 85-105 120-140 170-190 190-230

DIN SERIES FITTINGS / RANGE “S”


THREADING 14x1,5 16x1,5 18x1,5 20x1,5 22x1,5 24x1,5 30x2 36x2 42x2 52x2

N.m 15-18 25-28 27-30 43-54 50-62 60-75 90-110 125-145 170-190 200-245

D/46 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING

- ATTENTION: Troubleshooting interventions should only be carried out by qualified personnel.

Do not carry out troubleshooting interventions if the “User Instructions” and “Safety Regulations” of the vehicle have not been
read and understood.

This symbol means that the problem can NOT be resolved without the assistance of an authorized DIECI Service workshop.

Troubleshooting of the load monitoring display and the central dashboard LCD display is described in Chapter “G”.

GROUP PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

The operator is not seated


in the driver’s seat Sit down properly in the driver’s seat

Direction lever is engaged Put the lever in neutral

No fuel Fill up the tank

ENGINE The vehicle will not start Battery cut-off disengaged Connect the battery cut-off

Battery dead Recharge the battery or replace it

Burnt out fuse Replace the fuse

Others Consult the handbook


Engine use and maintenance

GROUP PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY


Accelerator Manual electronic Disengage electronic accelerator
The vehicle does not move in accelerator engaged
any direction
The sensor incorporated in the seat
Sit down correctly
- ATTENTION: does not sense a person’s presence

During the vehicle displacement or The forward/reverse lever is not Engage the lever
towing remain seated otherwise the engaged (pilot light switched off) in the required position
HYDRAULIC parking brake will be automatically
TRANSMISSION engaged (after a few seconds) Slow/fast speed not engaged
SYSTEM (pilot light switched off) Press the gear switch

Hydraulic oil
Remove the oil filter and replace it
suction filter clogged

The vehicle loses speed Hydrostatic transmission Repair or replace


damaged the transmission

Consult the handbook,


Diesel engine anomaly
Page D/48 Engine Use and Maintenance

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/47
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

TROUBLESHOOTING

GROUP PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Level of hydraulic oil insufficient Check the level of hydraulic oil


The vehicle does not move
in any direction
Parking brake on Disengage the brake
HYDRAULIC - ATTENTION:
TRANSMISSION During vehicle displacement or
SYSTEM towing remain seated otherwise the Hydrostatic transmission damaged Repair or replace the transmission
parking brake will be automatically
engaged (after a few seconds)
Electric circuit failure Repair the circuit

The gate under the car is closed


Open the gate
(towed car)

GROUP PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Fluid leaking from the circuit Check for leaks

BRAKES The vehicle does not brake Brake pads worn Replace brake pads

Brake system failure Repair or replace

GROUP PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

The wheels are not aligned correctly Realign

Reposition lever
Steering selection error
in a different steering position
The vehicle moves diagonally/
STEERING
The wheels are not aligned Repair or replace
Steering system failure
the distributor

Oil leaking from Replace the gaskets


hydraulic steering cylinders

D/48 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING

GROUP PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY


See the chapter
Safety devices have been activated
“Getting to know the vehicle”

Electric circuit failure Check fuses and the electrical


system

Level of hydraulic fluid in tank is


Top up
insufficient

The vehicle will not lift load


Relevant hydraulic pump failure Repair or replace pump

TELESCOPIC
BOOM
Check and take off the
Distributor regulated too low
distributor

Internal leakage in raising cylinders Replace the gaskets

Safety systems have been ac-


The boom does not extend See the chapter
tivated (pilot lights and alarms
“Getting to know the vehicle”
switched on)

Safety systems have been acti-


The boom cannot be lowered See the chapter
vated (pilot lights and acoustic
“Getting to know the vehicle”
alarms switch on)

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/49
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

HOW TO COMPLETE THE SERVICE REGISTER


The “SERVICE REGISTER” must be completed in compliance with the Essential Safety Requirement 4.4.2.b of Enclosure I of Ma-
chine Directive EC/98/37, to prove that all machine inspection and service activities concerning safety have been carried out correctly.
Together with every activity concerning the life and use of the machine (replacement of parts, services, malfunctions, etc.)
the Service Register must also include information regarding all the quarterly and yearly inspections provided for by law, in-
cluding those indicated in the “Maintenance” section and “Attachments” chapter of this Manual.
The name of the service engineer and the date the job was carried must also be clearly indicated.
You are recommended to complete, up-date and keep this Service Register with care throughout the entire life of the machine.
The following pages have been left free to ease creation of your own Service Register.

OBLIGATIONS AND HOW TO FORWARD STATEMENTS TO I.S.P.E.S.L. (SUPREME INSTITUTE FOR


ACCIDENT PREVENTION AND SAFETY IN THE WORKPLACE)
The Italian Ministerial Decree dated 12/09/1959, under Title II – Article 7, states that the employers and users of engine-driven
lifting equipment having capacities greater than 200 kg and personnel platforms, are obliged to inform the competent au-
thority (currently I.S.P.E.S.L. - the Supreme Institute For Accident Prevention And Safety In The Workplace in Italy) when the
machine is commissioned, specifying the place of installation of the machine so that this authority may make an initial inspection.
This fulfilment is confirmed by Article 11 – section 3 of Italian Presidential Decree 459 dated 24/07/1996, a national law that
transposes Machine Directive EC/98/37.
The statement to the Supreme Institute for Accident Prevention and Safety in the Workplace is made by enclosing a copy
of the EC Statement of Conformity of the machine, with reference to Enclosure IIA of Italian PRESIDENTIAL DECREE
459/96 – Machine Directive EC/98/37.
The original statements (EC Statement of Conformity – Enclosure IIA or Manufacturer’s Statement –Enclosure IIB) must be kept by the client.
The statement shall be forwarded to the Supreme Institute for Accident Prevention and Safety in the Workplace by registered
post with advice of receipt.
The Supreme Institute For Accident Prevention And Safety In The Workplace will then inform the local surveillance authority
(A.S.L. in Italy) that the machine is in use; this authority is then in charge of the subsequent yearly inspections.

SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS AND REGISTRATION METHOD


The employer or user of the machine must ensure the machine is inspected regularly pursuant to the law
(Italian Presidential Decree 547 dated 27/4/55; Italian Ministerial Decree 12/9/59 and Italian Decree Law 626 dated 19/9/94).
He or she must also comply with the maintenance and inspection schedule described in this Use and Maintenance Manual.
Inspections and scheduled tests, together with maintenance work must be carried out by especially employed experts, or by
a workshop authorised by the manufacturer, DIECI S.r.l.
The employer/user of the machine must record the results of the tests and inspections in the Service Register, or ask specifi-
cally trained personnel to record them.
The scheduled tests and inspections that must be recorded in the “Service Register” are:
a) Quarterly inspections that involve the operation and/or efficiency of ropes/chains according to Article 179 of Italian
Presidential Decree 547 dated 27/4/55.
b) Yearly inspections that involve the operation and the preservation of the machine in terms of safety (yearly tests,
corrosion inspections, calibration tests, etc.) according to Article 194 of Italian Presidential Decree 547 dated 27/4/55.
The law foresees administrative fines for those who fail to carry out quarterly and yearly inspections.
The Service Register, in which the inspections are recorded, must be shown on request to the inspectors in charge of ensu-
ring that the current laws are observed.
After the yearly inspection has been carried out, the A.S.L. inspector issues an acceptance report or prescribes the ac-
tion necessary to fulfil legal requirements. The user is obliged to store the inspection report with the Service Register.
If the local surveillance authority (A.S.L. in Italy) should fail to make the yearly inspection, you are in any event recom-
mended to have the yearly inspection carried out by a qualified engineer and record the results in the Service Register.
The evaluations of the inspections must be registered in the reserved pages below, indicating the outcome of the inspection,
the date, the signature and any comments by the inspector.
If not enough pages have been reserved within this manual to contain all the notes concerning the life of the machine, use
additional sheets of paper, remembering to complete them in the same manner.

D/50 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
GENERAL MACHINE INFORMATION

Manufacturer: Dieci S.r.l.

Model: ...................................................................................... serial number ................................................ Year ..........................

Attachment................................................................... serial number ................................................ Year .....................................

Max. capacity [kg]: ............................................................................................................................................................................

Attachment ................................................................... serial number ................................................ Year .....................................

Max. capacity [kg]: ..............................................................................................................................................................................

Attachment................................................................... serial number ................................................ Year .....................................

Max. capacity [kg]: ............................................................................................................................................................................

Attachment................................................................... serial number ................................................ Year .....................................

Max. capacity [kg]: ............................................................................................................................................................................

Owner: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Machine commissioning date: .............................................................................................................................................

FOR FURTHER CONTROLS OR REPORTS TO THE COMPETENT AUTHORITIES, PLEASE REFER


TO THE LOCAL LEGISLATION IN FORCE IN THE COUNTRY WHERE THE MACHINE IS USED.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/51
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT blank for printing purposes

D/52 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
RECORDING PERIODIC INSPECTIONS
AND MAINTENANCE WORK COMPLETED
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE 50 h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE
Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours
Emptying the fuel tank
Check for leaks in hydraulic circuit hoses
Boom joint pin lubrication
Lubrication of foot/head jack pins
Lubrication of foot/head lifting jack pins
Lubrication of Jack levelling foot and head pins
Lubrication of Front/rear wheel pivot pins
Lubrication of steering cylinders (160.10-210.10)
Lubrication of front/rear axle oscillation axles
Lubrication of cross and cardan transmission shafts
Lubrication of boom sliders

Date Signature Date Signature

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE 100 h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE


Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Air filter cleaning


Lubrication of differential axles
Tyre pressure check
Ensure that all nuts and bolts are tight
Ensure radiator is not clogged
Check stickers

Date Signature Date Signature

- CAUTION - - CAUTION -
The maintenance work in bold type is considered Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel
fundamental for safety by DIECI. who must sign the scheduled maintenance report.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/53
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT blank for printing purposes

D/54 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE 250h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE
Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Replace engine oil


Replace engine oil filter
Replace air filter
Check battery electrolyte level
Check electric circuits
Check alternator belt
Tighten wheel nuts
Replace hydraulic oil return filter.
Replace hydromatic oil filter.
Replace hydraulic oil.

Date Signature Date Signature

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE 500 h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE


Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Replace fuel filter.


Empty fuel tank.
Replace or clean hydraulic oil suction and return filters
Check oil level in epicycloidal reduction gear.
Check gear change oil level
Check oil level in differential sump
Tighten boom sliders.
Replace engine oil filter.
Clean fuel injection pump filter
Replace engine oil

Date Signature Date Signature

- CAUTION - - CAUTION -
The maintenance work in bold type is considered Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel
fundamental for safety by DIECI. who must sign the scheduled maintenance report.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/55
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT blank for printing purposes

D/56 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE 1000h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE
Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours
Replacing cooling liquid
Replace oil in differential sump
Replace oil level in epicycloidal reduction gears
Change oil
Replace hydraulic system oil
Replace air filter

Date Signature Date Signature

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE


Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Date Signature Date Signature

- CAUTION - - CAUTION -
The maintenance work in bold type is considered Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel
fundamental for safety by DIECI. who must sign the scheduled maintenance report.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/57
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT blank for printing purposes

D/58 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE
Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Date Signature Date Signature

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE


Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Date Signature Date Signature

- CAUTION - - CAUTION -
The tables must be filled out clearly, using the Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel
spaces provided. who must sign the scheduled maintenance report.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/59
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT blank for printing purposes

D/60 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE
Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Date Signature Date Signature

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE


Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Date Signature Date Signature

- CAUTION - - CAUTION -
The tables must be filled out clearly, using the Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel
spaces provided. who must sign the scheduled maintenance report.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/61
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT blank for printing purposes

D/62 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE
Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Date Signature Date Signature

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE h EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE


Machine
Job Job accomplished Job description
working hours

Date Signature Date Signature

- CAUTION - - CAUTION -
The tables must be filled out clearly, using the Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel
spaces provided. who must sign the scheduled maintenance report.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. D/63
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Maintenance and Registering

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT blank for printing purposes

D/64 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
AND CIRCUITS

E/1
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

E/2
BASE SYSTEM KEY - DIS. N° E25800-088

NAME DESCRIPTION SHEET


A4 LEFT DIFFUSER 7,3
A5 RIGHT DIFFUSER 7,3
A31 CAR RADIO 7,2
A51 ACCELERATOR PEDAL 1,5
A55 IDR 3B6 DISPLAY 6,1
A89 J1939 DIAGNOSTICS 1,5
A264 PERKINS ECU ENGINE 1,4
A314 MC2M CONTROL UNIT 1,3
B12 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1,3
B13 HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH 1,2
B27 SEAT MICRO SWITCH 1,3
B34 MECHANICAL GEAR ENGAGED MICRO SWITCH 1,2
B35 2nd GEAR PRESSURE SWITCH 1,3
B39 STOP LIGHTS MICRO SWITCH 3,3
B60 FRONT AXLE ALIGN SENSOR 5,1
B61 REAR AXLE ALIGNMENT SENSOR 4,3
B62 LIFTING BASE PRESSURE SWITCH 4,4
B62A LIFTING BASE 2 PRESSURE SWITCH 4,4
B63 LIFTING ROD PRESSURE SWITCH 4,3
B63A LIFTING ROD 2 PRESSURE SWITCH 4,3
B64 COMPENSATOR BASE PRESSURE SWITCH 4,4
B64A COMPENSATOR BASE 2 PRESSURE SWITCH 4,4
B65 COMPENSATOR ROD PRESSURE SWITCH 4,5
B65A COMPENSATOR ROD 2 PRESSURE SWITCH 4,5
B75 FAN DRIVE THERMAL CONTACT 2,5
B77 HIGH BOOM MICRO 4,2
B79 BRAKES OIL CIRCUIT PRESSURE SWITCH 4,2
B263 CLOGGED AIR FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH 1,3
B295 SPEED SENSOR 5,1
B326 MICRO INCHING 4,5
B332 BRAKE PRESSURE SWITCH FOR GEAR CHANGE 4,5
B340 NEGATIVE BRAKE FAILURE PRESSURE SWITCH 2,5
B341 HYDRAULIC OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE THERMOSTAT 2,2
E1 RIGHT REAR WORK LIGHT 7,2
E2 RIGHT FRONT WORK LIGHT 7,1
E4 LEFT FRONT WORK LIGHT 7,1
E7 CEILING LIGHT 7,4
E18 LEFT REAR WORK LIGHT 7,1
E22 RIGHT REAR LIGHT 3,3
E23 LEFT REAR LIGHT 3,3
E24 PLATE LIGHT 3,4
E25 RIGHT FRONT LIGHT 3,1
E26 LEFT FRONT LIGHT 3,2
E27 REVOLVING LIGHT 7,4
F1A BEAM HEADLIGHTS FUSE 3,2
F1B FAN SELECTOR FUSE 7,3
F2A DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT FUSE 3,1
F2B OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY FUSE 8,2
F3A MC2M POWER SUPPLY FUSE 8,2
F3B REAR WINDSCREEN FUSE 3,5

E/3
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

BASE SYSTEM KEY - DIS. N° E25800-058

NAME DESCRIPTION SHEET


F4A LIGHT-SWITCH FUSE 1,2
F4B OPTIONAL LINE + BOOM HEAD SWITCH FUSE (EV 1-2-3) 5,4
F5A REVOLVING LIGHT FUSE 7,5
F5B PNEUMATIC SEAT FUSE 7,3
F6A FUSE +30 WARNING 3,4
F6B FRONT WORK LIGHTS FUSE 7,1
F7A CEILING LIGHT+RADIO+CURRENT SOCKET FUSE 7,2
F7B REAR WORK LIGHTS FUSE 7,2
F8A FUSE + 30 ALGA INSTRUMENT 1,2
F8B FRONT WINDSCREEN FUSE 3,4
F9A HORN FUSE 3,3
F9B SWITCHES LIGHTING + 15 RADIO FUSE 4,2
F10A FUSE + VE AND INSTRUMENT 15/54 CONTROL BOARD 4,1
F10B AIR CONDITIONER FUSE 7,5
F11A MUSHROOM EMERGENCY BUTTON FUSE 8,1
F11B STOP LIGHTS MICRO FUSE 3,3
F12A FUSE +15/54 BASKET 8,2
F12B BOOM HEAD LIGHT SWITCH FUSE 5,3
F13A POSITION LIGHTS FUSE 3,2
F13B REVERSE LIGHT FUSE 2,3
F14A RADIO LIGHT.-INSTRUMENT LIGHT.-POSITION LIGHTS FUSE 3,2
F14B DRIVE DISCONNECTION FUSE 2,3
F15A FAN DRIVE FUSE 2,5
F15B FUSE +VE SWITCH/MICRO +58 SERVICES 4,3
F16A FUSE + VE AND INSTRUMENT 15 SERVICES 2,5
F16B FUSE +15 WARNING 3,3
FG1 START RELAY FUSE 1,2
FG2 IGNITION PLUG RELAY FUSE 1,1
FG3 CAB FUSE 1,2
FG4 ALTERNATOR FUSE 1,2
FG6 EMERGENCY RELAY FUSE 1,2
G1 BATTERY 1,1
G290 ALTERNATOR 1,1
H1 REVERSE BUZZER 3,4
H3 HORN 3,2
K1A FULL BEAM HEADLIGHTS RELAY 3,1
K1B RADIO CONTROL SELECTOR RELAY OFF 1,1
K2A DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS RELAY 3,1
K2B SERVICES RELAY 1,1
K3A FORWARD GEAR RELAY 2,1
K3B IDLE GEAR RELAY 1,1
K4A REVERSE GEAR RELAY 2,2
K4B RADIO, BASKET START, SEAT MICRO RELAY 1,1
K5A DRIVE DISCONNECTION RELAY 2,2
K6A BUZZER/REVERSE LIGHT RELAY 2,3
K7A HORN RELAY 3,1
K16 SERVICES RELAY +58 1,1
K36 START RELAY 1,1
K88 MANUAL ACCELERATOR BISTABLE RELAY 6,3
K265 INDICATORS INTERMITTENCE 6,3
K279 FAN THIRD SPEED RELAY 7,3

E/4
BASE SYSTEM KEY - DIS. N° E25800-058

NAME DESCRIPTION SHEET


K292 IGNITION PLUG RELAY 1,1
K293 EMERGENCY RELAY 1,3
M1 STARTER MOTOR 1,1
M2 REAR WINDSCREEN MOTOR 3,5
M8 REAR WINDSCREEN WASHER 3,5
M9 FRONT WINDSCREEN WASHER 3,5
M32 PNEUMATIC SEAT 7,4
M33 AIR CONDITIONER MOTOR 7,5
M59 FRONT WINDSCREEN MOTOR 3,4
M270 HEATING FAN 7,5
P1 INSTRUMENT 1,3
R14 IGNITION PLUG 1,2
R282 INDICATOR LIGHT ATTENUATOR 3,2
R332 INDICATOR LIGHT ATTENUATOR 6,5
S0 BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH 1,1
S1 WARNING SWITCH 3,2
S8 MECHANICAL GEARS BUTTON 4,2
S11 BOOM HEAD SOLENOID VALVE SWITCH 5,4
S28 FRONT WINDSCREEN SWITCH 3,3
S37 START GEAR 2,1
S40 LIGHT SWITCH 3,1
S41 STARTING CONTROL BOARD 1,1
S48 FRONT WORK LIGHTS SWITCH 7,1
S50 AUTO. WHEELS ALIGNMENT BUTTON 4,3
S52 STEERING SELECTOR 5,5
S53 MANUAL ACCELERATOR SWITCH 6,3
S68 FAN DRIVE BUTTON 5,1
S78 TBD SWITCH 6,2
S103 BOOM HEAD WORK LIGHT SWITCH 5,4
S111 EMERGENCY MUSHROOM 8,2
S273 MANUAL AXLE BLOCK SWITCH 5,2
S274 LEVELLING BUTTON 5,2
S278 ARB EXCLUSION BUTTON 4,4
S280 FAN SPEED SELECTOR 7,3
S281 A/C SWITCH 7,4
S283 REAR WINDSCREEN SWITCH 3,5
S285 REAR WORK LIGHTS SWITCH 7,2
S286 PARKING BRAKE SWITCH 4,1
S287 REVOLVING LIGHT SWITCH 7,4
S315 CAB JOYSTICK 2,2
S332 QUICK COUPLING SWITCH 5,5
Y4 LEFT LEVELLING SOLENOID VALVE 6,2
Y17 STEERING A SOLENOID VALVE 2,2
Y18 STEERING B SOLENOID VALVE 2,2
Y19 STEERING C SOLENOID VALVE 2,3
Y20 STEERING D SOLENOID VALVE 2,3
Y21 MECHANICAL SECOND GEAR SOLENOID VALVE 2,5
Y71 DISCHARGE H20 FAN DRIVE SOLENOID VALVE 4,1
Y72 REVERSE H2O FAN DRIVE SOLENOID VALVE 4,1
Y73 DISCHARGE OIL FAN DRIVE SOLENOID VALVE 4,2
Y74 REVERSE OIL FAN DRIVE SOLENOID VALVE 4,2

E/5
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

BASE SYSTEM KEY - DIS. N° E25800-058

NAME DESCRIPTION SHEET


Y76 FAN SECOND SPEED SOLENOID VALVE 2,5
Y288 REVERSE GEAR SOLENOID VALVE 2,1
Y289 FORWARD GEAR SOLENOID VALVE 2,1
Y297 MECHANICAL FIRST GEAR SOLENOID VALVE 2,4
Y298 PARKING BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE 2,4
Y299 RIGHT LEVELLING SOLENOID VALVE 6,3
Y316A BOOM RETRACTION SOLENOID VALVE 5,3
Y316B BOOM EXTENSION SOLENOID VALVE 5,4
Y317A BOOM ASCENT SOLENOID VALVE 5,4
Y317B BOOM DESCENT SOLENOID VALVE 5,4
Y318A SWIVEL UP SOLENOID VALVE 5,5
Y318B SWIVEL DOWN SOLENOID VALVE 5,5
Y319A RIGHT SERVICE SOLENOID VALVE 6,4
Y319B SERVICE OUT SOLENOID VALVE 6,3
Y321 VENTING SOLENOID VALVE (ON/OFF) 6,3
X9 OPTIONAL LINE INTERFACE CONNECTOR 7,5
X10 BASKET LINE INTERFACE CONNECTOR 8,4
X29 CAN BUS LINE END CONNECTOR 1,3
X54 CURRENT SOCKET 7,3
X58 OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR 8,1
X69 BASKET/HOIST/FORKS SEL. KIT INTERFACE CONNECTOR 6,1
X70 RADIO CONTROL SELECTOR KIT INTERFACE CONNECTOR 6,4
X86 DIODES INTERFACE CONNECTOR 6,4
X87 BASKET LINE INTERFACE CONNECTOR 8,2
X90 CAN LINE END CONNECTOR 6,1
X91 OPEN CAN DIAGNOSTICS 5,3
X324 WINDER INTERFACE CONNECTOR 5,2
X329 CAN DIAGNOSTICS CONNECTOR 5,2
X342 OPTIONAL CONNECTOR 1,2
X396 REGENERATIVE SOLENOID VALVE INTERFACE CONNECTOR 8,3
X397 OPTIONAL WIRES CONNECTOR 8,5
X398 OPTIONAL WIRES CONNECTOR 8,4
X399 OPTIONAL WIRES CONNECTOR 8,5
X15 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - LINE UPPER CAB
X275 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - LEFT DASHBOARD LINE
X276 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - LEFT DASHBOARD LINE
X277 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - LEFT DASHBOARD LINE
X56 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - RIGHT DASHBOARD LINE
X57 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - RIGHT DASHBOARD LINE
X30 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - MOTOR LINE
X296 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - MOTOR LINE
X80 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - FRONT FRAME LINE
X5 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - FRONT FRAME LINE
X81 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - REAR FRAME LINE
X82 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - REAR FRAME LINE
X296 INTERFACE CONNECTOR LINE DRIVER POSITION - REAR FRAME LINE
X23 INTERFACE CONNECTOR REAR FRAME LINE - LEFT REAR LIGHT EXTENSION
X24 INTERFACE CONNECTOR REAR FRAME LINE - RIGHT REAR LIGHT EXTENSION
X25 INTERFACE CONNECTOR REAR FRAME LINE - LEFT FRONT LIGHT EXTENSION
X26 INTERFACE CONNECTOR REAR FRAME LINE - RIGHT FRONT LIGHT EXTEN-

E/6
WIRE COLOURS
A SKY BLUE
B WHITE
C ORANGE
G YELLOW
H GREY
L DARK BLUE
M BROWN
N BLACK
R RED
S PINK
V GREEN
Z PURPLE

NOTE:
WIRES WITH TWO COLOURS ARE INDICATED BY COMBINING THE SYMBOLS ABOVE, FOR EXAMPLE:

G/V - YELLOW/GREEN (HORIZONTAL STRIPES)

Y-G- YELLOW-GREEN (VERTICAL STRIPES)

E/7
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

Valid certified
copy only

E/8
Valid certified
copy only

E/9
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

Valid certified
copy only

E/10
Valid certified
copy only

E/11
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

Valid certified
copy only

E/12
Valid certified
copy only

E/13
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

Valid certified
copy only

E/14
Valid certified
copy only

E/15
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Electrical diagrams and circuits

THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

E/16
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. F/1
Model E.T. HERCULES Hydraulic system

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

F/2 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
ANY MODIFICATION TO THE MACHINE REQUIRES A NEW TEST TO CHECK
CONFORMITY WITH THE “ “ MACHINE DIRECTIVE 98/37. THE SAME
APPLIES IN CASE OF REPAIRS WITH NON ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS.

USE OF THE MACHINE BEFORE THE CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL HAVE BEEN
CAREFULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD IS FORBIDDEN.

ANY ARBITRARY MODIFICATION TO THE MACHINE SHALL RELEASE DIECI FROM


ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY CONSEQUENT DAMAGE OR INJURY THAT MIGHT
DERIVE FROM SUCH MODIFICATION.

FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY AND THAT OF OTHERS, DO NOT MODIFY THE STRUC-
TURE OR SETTINGS OF THE VARIOUS MACHINE COMPONENTS (HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE, LIMITING DEVICE CALIBRATION, ENGINE SPEED, ASSEMBLY OF
SUPPLEMENTARY ATTACHMENTS, ETC.)
THE SAME APPLIES TO DISABLING OR MODIFYING SAFETY SYSTEMS. IN THESE
CASES, THE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE RELIEVED OF ANY LIABILITY.

THE IMAGES, DESCRIPTIONS AND MEASUREMENTS IN THIS CHAPTER ALL


REFER TO STANDARD MACHINES.

UPON REQUEST, YOUR MACHINE CAN BE FITTED OUT WITH OPTIONAL


CONTROLS AND ACCESSORIES.

ANY FUNCTION OR PROCEDURE REGARDING THE USE AND FITTING OF MACHINE


ATTACHMENTS NOT DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.

IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO USE THE MACHINE FOR PURPOSES OTHER


THAN THOSE DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL.

READING AND UNDERSTANDING CHAPTER “B” (SAFETY STANDARDS) BEFORE


READING CHAPTER “C” AND BEFORE USING THE MACHINE IS COMPULSORY.

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine. F/3
F/4

HERCULES 120.10







    


  
 
   




 


     


     

     


  
 


        

  
 
 

 

     
Model E.T. HERCULES

     
  


           

  


  

 



  



     
   









  

    

  
 
 
   
 

   

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Hydraulic system
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM KEY

PIDR =...................HYDROSTATIC PUMP CSFI =..............EXTENSION CYLINDER ACC =..............ACCUMULATOR

MIDR =.................HYDROSTATIC ENGINE PIDR =..............PRESA IDRAULICA VFI =..............HYDRAULIC BRAKING VALVE

VINC =...................INCHING VALVE IDR =..............HYDROGUIDE VB =..............LOCK VALVE

CCVE =..................SPEED CHANGE ACTUATOR VAMS =.............STEERING AMPLIFICATION VALVE CLIV =..............LEVELLING CYLINDER

CFRN =...................NEGATIVE BRAKE ACTUATOR CSTP =..............REAR STEERING CYLINDER VIV =..............MOTOR INVERSION VALVE

VFRN =..................NEGATIVE BRAKE CONTROL VALVE CSTA =..............FRONT STEERING CYLINDER MIR =..............REVERSIBLE HYDRAULIC ENGINE

VLVE =..................SPEED CONTROL VALVE VSST =..............STEERING SELECTOR VALVE VU =..............ONE-WAY VALVE

PCA =......OPEN CIRCUIT PUMP LS UBR =.....REGENERATIVE LOCK VALVE SC =..............HEAT EXCHANGER

DIST =...................DISTRIBUTOR VLIV =.....LEVELLING VALVE MI =..............HYDROSTATIC MOTOR

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
CSOL. =..............LIFTING CYCLINDER P =.....PUMP

CBRA =.................SWIVEL CYLINDER F =.....FILTER

CCOMP =..............COMPENSATION CYLINDER VAP =.....PRESSURE ACCUMULATION VALVE

F/5

Model E.T. HERCULES Hydraulic system
HERCULES 120.10















































 







F/6 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM KEY

PIDR =...................HYDROSTATIC PUMP CSFI =..............EXTENSION CYLINDER ACC =..............ACCUMULATOR

MIDR =.................HYDROSTATIC ENGINE PIDR =..............PRESA IDRAULICA VFI =..............HYDRAULIC BRAKING VALVE

VINC =...................INCHING VALVE IDR =..............HYDROGUIDE VB =..............LOCK VALVE

CCVE =..................SPEED CHANGE ACTUATOR VAMS =.............STEERING AMPLIFICATION VALVE CLIV =..............LEVELLING CYLINDER

CFRN =...................NEGATIVE BRAKE ACTUATOR CSTP =..............REAR STEERING CYLINDER VIV =..............MOTOR INVERSION VALVE

VFRN =..................NEGATIVE BRAKE CONTROL VALVE CSTA =..............FRONT STEERING CYLINDER MIR =..............REVERSIBLE HYDRAULIC ENGINE

VLVE =..................SPEED CONTROL VALVE VSST =..............STEERING SELECTOR VALVE VU =..............ONE-WAY VALVE

PCA =......OPEN CIRCUIT PUMP LS UBR =.....REGENERATIVE LOCK VALVE SC =..............HEAT EXCHANGER

DIST =...................DISTRIBUTOR VLIV =.....LEVELLING VALVE MI =..............HYDROSTATIC MOTOR

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
CSOL. =..............LIFTING CYCLINDER P =.....PUMP

CBRA =.................SWIVEL CYLINDER F =.....FILTER

CCOMP =..............COMPENSATION CYLINDER VAP =.....PRESSURE ACCUMULATION VALVE

F/7
F/8
HERCULES 160.10
     



 
 
   
 
 







   
  
 

 





  

   

     

            

 





 
 


Model E.T. HERCULES

 
 
   
   
     
   
 
       

 

  

 



  



      
   



   



   


    

    
 

 
   
  

   

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Hydraulic system
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM KEY

PIDR =...................HYDROSTATIC PUMP CSFI =..............EXTENSION CYLINDER ACC =..............ACCUMULATOR

MIDR =.................HYDROSTATIC ENGINE PIDR =..............PRESA IDRAULICA VFI =..............HYDRAULIC BRAKING VALVE

VINC =...................INCHING VALVE IDR =..............HYDROGUIDE VB =..............LOCK VALVE

CCVE =..................SPEED CHANGE ACTUATOR VAMS =.............STEERING AMPLIFICATION VALVE CLIV =..............LEVELLING CYLINDER

CFRN =...................NEGATIVE BRAKE ACTUATOR CSTP =..............REAR STEERING CYLINDER VIV =..............MOTOR INVERSION VALVE

VFRN =..................NEGATIVE BRAKE CONTROL VALVE CSTA =..............FRONT STEERING CYLINDER MIR =..............REVERSIBLE HYDRAULIC ENGINE

VLVE =..................SPEED CONTROL VALVE VSST =..............STEERING SELECTOR VALVE VU =..............ONE-WAY VALVE

PCA =......OPEN CIRCUIT PUMP LS UBR =.....REGENERATIVE LOCK VALVE SC =..............HEAT EXCHANGER

DIST =...................DISTRIBUTOR VLIV =.....LEVELLING VALVE MI =..............HYDROSTATIC MOTOR

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
CSOL. =..............LIFTING CYCLINDER P =.....PUMP

CBRA =.................SWIVEL CYLINDER F =.....FILTER

CCOMP =..............COMPENSATION CYLINDER VAP =.....PRESSURE ACCUMULATION VALVE

F/9
F/10
HERCULES 210.10
     



 
 
   
 
 







   
  
 

 





  

   

     

            

 





 

    
Model E.T. HERCULES

 
 

 
   
    
 

 
        
  

  

 



  



      
   



   



   


    

    
 

 
   
  

   

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Hydraulic system
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM KEY

PIDR =...................HYDROSTATIC PUMP CSFI =..............EXTENSION CYLINDER ACC =..............ACCUMULATOR

MIDR =.................HYDROSTATIC ENGINE PIDR =..............PRESA IDRAULICA VFI =..............HYDRAULIC BRAKING VALVE

VINC =...................INCHING VALVE IDR =..............HYDROGUIDE VB =..............LOCK VALVE

CCVE =..................SPEED CHANGE ACTUATOR VAMS =.............STEERING AMPLIFICATION VALVE CLIV =..............LEVELLING CYLINDER

CFRN =...................NEGATIVE BRAKE ACTUATOR CSTP =..............REAR STEERING CYLINDER VIV =..............MOTOR INVERSION VALVE

VFRN =..................NEGATIVE BRAKE CONTROL VALVE CSTA =..............FRONT STEERING CYLINDER MIR =..............REVERSIBLE HYDRAULIC ENGINE

VLVE =..................SPEED CONTROL VALVE VSST =..............STEERING SELECTOR VALVE VU =..............ONE-WAY VALVE

PCA =......OPEN CIRCUIT PUMP LS UBR =.....REGENERATIVE LOCK VALVE SC =..............HEAT EXCHANGER

DIST =...................DISTRIBUTOR VLIV =.....LEVELLING VALVE MI =..............HYDROSTATIC MOTOR

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
CSOL. =..............LIFTING CYCLINDER P =.....PUMP

CBRA =.................SWIVEL CYLINDER F =.....FILTER

CCOMP =..............COMPENSATION CYLINDER VAP =.....PRESSURE ACCUMULATION VALVE

F/11



F/12
HERCULES 160.10
HERCULES 210.10
 

 

 

  


  


  

  

Model E.T. HERCULES



 

 

  

  



 
 


  

 

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
Hydraulic system
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM KEY

PIDR =...................HYDROSTATIC PUMP CSFI =..............EXTENSION CYLINDER ACC =..............ACCUMULATOR

MIDR =.................HYDROSTATIC ENGINE PIDR =..............PRESA IDRAULICA VFI =..............HYDRAULIC BRAKING VALVE

VINC =...................INCHING VALVE IDR =..............HYDROGUIDE VB =..............LOCK VALVE

CCVE =..................SPEED CHANGE ACTUATOR VAMS =.............STEERING AMPLIFICATION VALVE CLIV =..............LEVELLING CYLINDER

CFRN =...................NEGATIVE BRAKE ACTUATOR CSTP =..............REAR STEERING CYLINDER VIV =..............MOTOR INVERSION VALVE

VFRN =..................NEGATIVE BRAKE CONTROL VALVE CSTA =..............FRONT STEERING CYLINDER MIR =..............REVERSIBLE HYDRAULIC ENGINE

VLVE =..................SPEED CONTROL VALVE VSST =..............STEERING SELECTOR VALVE VU =..............ONE-WAY VALVE

PCA =......OPEN CIRCUIT PUMP LS UBR =.....REGENERATIVE LOCK VALVE SC =..............HEAT EXCHANGER

DIST =...................DISTRIBUTOR VLIV =.....LEVELLING VALVE MI =..............HYDROSTATIC MOTOR

- CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
CSOL. =..............LIFTING CYCLINDER P =.....PUMP

CBRA =.................SWIVEL CYLINDER F =.....FILTER

CCOMP =..............COMPENSATION CYLINDER VAP =.....PRESSURE ACCUMULATION VALVE

F/13
Model E.T. HERCULES Hydraulic system

THIS PAGE HAS INTENTIONALLY BEEN LEFT BLANK FOR PRINTING PURPOSES

F/14 - CAUTION: - Read the SAFETY REGULATIONS (in this manual) carefully for the safety of all personnel and the machine.
TECHNICAL DATA
and
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

G/1
Model E.T. HERCULES Technical data

- CAUTION -
An operator on the ground must be present while the basket is being used.

- CAUTION -
To use attachments, consult the capacity diagrams.

- CAUTION -
To use attachments with radio control,
read the instructions in the enclosed manual.

- CAUTION -
To use attachments with the load limiting device (with display)
(optional), read the instructions in the enclosed manual.

- CAUTION -
Before assembling attachments on the machine,
check machine/attachment compatibility according
to the contents of the conformity certificates
issued by the manufacturer.

G/2
Hercules 120.10
0.6 m

AXB1450
11 11

10 MAX 12 ton 10 M

9 9,4 9
60° D

7,0
8 C 8

7,5
50°

7,5
B
7 7

8.5
A
40°
6 6

10
12
5 30°
5

4 4
20°
3 3

3,5
2 2

5,2
10°
1 1
3,0

4,4

0 0° 6,3 0
-3°
-1 -1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 m
4,9 EN1459

PERFORMANCES ENGINE
PERKINS 1104D-ETA - 106 kW
Maximum capacity:....................................................... 12,000 kg Maximum power:.......................... 106 kW (144 hp) at 2,200 rpm
Capacity at maximum height on tyres:........................... 7,000 kg Type:............................ four-stroke, diesel engine, Common-Rail 11
Capacity at maximum boom extension on tyres:............ 3,000 kg Cylinders number and layout:........................... 4, vertical in line 10 M
Maximum lifting height on tyres:....................................... 9.40 m Displacement:............ 4,399 cm3 -Turbo compressor aftercooler
Maximum horizontal boom extension:.............................. 4.90 m Cooling system:.................................................................. liquid 9
Boom extension at maximum height:................................ 0.60 m Specific fuel consumption (2,200 rpm):........ 230g/kWh 8
Fork tilting angle:...................................................................120° Electronic accelerator.
Tearing force:............................................................. 11,400 daN Manual accelerator.
7
Maximum allowable slope with load:................................... 39 % Air pre-heater for cold climates. 6
Total empty weight:....................................................... 16,700 kg
5
Max speed:..................................................................... 28 km/h REFUELLING (litre)
4

TRANSMISSION Oil tank:.................................................................................. 300 3


Fuel tank:................................................................................ 270
2
Transmission:............... hydrostatic with variable delivery pump
Hydraulic engine:............................... with automatic adjustment 1
STANDARD DEVICES
Reversing gear:............................................... electro - hydraulic 0
Inching pedal for controlled forward movement.
Anti-tipping device with block for hazardous movements. -1
Servocontrolled 2-speed gear box.
Hydraulic socket for possible accessories on boom head.
-2
ROPS - FOPS approved closed soundproof cab, with heating.
m
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Self-locking differential on front axle (limited slip 45%).
High efficiency cyclone self-cleaning air filter.
Gear Pump:........................................................ 53 l/1' / 200 bar
Variable delivery pump (Load Sensing):........... 160 l/1' / 280 bar
Control valve with joystick:.................................................. 4 in 1 TYRES
Simultaneous movements:........................................................ 4
Proportional control distributor “Load Sensing” with “Flow Sharing” Tyres:............................................................................ 17.5 R25
Alternative:...................................................................16.00 R25 M
12
DIFFERENTIAL AXLES (HEAVY DUTY)
11
OPTIONAL AND ACCESSORIES
Steering axles:......................... 2, with planetary reduction gears 10
A/C; Webasto heater; digital speedometer; water heater;
Type of steering:..................... 4 wheels / transversal / 2 wheels 9
pneumatic seat suspension; light on boom head; quick
Front axle:............................................................................ rigid
attachment for accessories; radio; anti-theft alarm; glass 8
Rear axle:.................................................................... oscillating
protection; Reversible fan; Wheel self-alignment.
Service brake:........................................ oil bath on the 4 wheels 7
(For further customised accessories, please consult your local dealer)
Negative parking brake. 6

4
0.6 m 0.6 m
3
SYMBOLS KEY

2
Forks Extender/transfer device Jib Centering
with capacity 0.6 m for forks with capacity 0.6 m (Measurements) handler jib 1

L 0
A
-1
m
DO NOT maneuver
Winch Hook for if the machine
(Capacity) fork carriage Fixed front basket
is NOT levelled

G/3
Model E.T. HERCULES Technical data

AXB1450/106A

AXB1450/103A
0.6 m
(12.0 ton)

11 11
10 MAX 11 ton 10 MAX 12 ton
9 9,4 9 9,3
60° D 60°
6,2

D
8 C 8
6,7

6,5 C
50° 50°
B B
7 7
7.5

A 7,9 A
40° 40°
6 6
8.5

10
12
11

5 5
30° 30°

4 4
20° 20°
3 3
2,5

2 3,4
2
4,3

10° 10° 5,8


1
1
1,9

2,7 4,4
3,5

5,4

0 0°
0 0°
-3°
-3° -1
-1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 -2
5,1 EN1459 m 6 5 4 3 2 1
4,63

0.6 m
AXB1450/104A

AXB1450
(8.0 ton)

11 11

10 MAX 8 ton 10 MAX 12 ton

9 9,3 9 9,4
60° D 60° D
7,0

8 C 8 C
6,6
7,5

50° 50°
7,5

B B
7 7
A
8.5

A
40° 40°
6 8 6
10
12

5
30° 5 30°
4
4
20°
3 20°
3
2 3,5
3,5

10° 5,9 2
5,2

1 10°
2,8 4,5 1
3,0

4,4

0
6,3


-3° 0 0°
-1
-3°
-1
-2
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 EN1459
4,9
4,63

G/4
AXB1450/9A
215

AXB1450/101A
120

11
13
10 MAX 12 ton
12
9,6 11,95
9 60° D 11
7,0

= 1000 kg
C 10
8 50°
7,6

B 60°
9 D
7 A C
40°

kg
8 50°
10.6

B
6

+
7 A
12

40°
5 30°
6

Max.
30°
4 5
20°
3 4 20°
3,4

3
5,2

2 10°
8.5

2 10°
2,9

1
4,4

6,3

1


0 0 -3°
-3°
-1 -1
m m 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 6,33
4,85

AXB1450/102A
AXB1450/24A

(2.7 m)

12

12 MAX 3 ton 11 MAX 6 ton


11,9
60° D
11 10
C 10
50° 60° D
10 B 9
4,5 C
A 50°
9 40° 8 B
5,3
A
8 7 40°
6
30° 3,0
7 6
30°
6 20° 5

5 4 20°
10°
4 3 1,8 2,3
2,6 10° 2,9 3,6
3 2

2 -3° 1

1 0 -3°

0 -1
m 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-1
6,9
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
4,6

G/5
Model E.T. HERCULES Technical data

G/6
Hercules 160.10
0,6 m

AXB1451
11 11

MAX 16 ton 10 M
10 10,2
60° E
9 9
D
50° C
8 8
,5 B
12
7 40° A 7

14 6
6
30°
5 5

16
4 4
20°
3 3

6,0
2

8,8
2 10°
5,0

1
7,2 1

11
0° 0
0
-3° -1
-1
m
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
5,15 EN1459

PERFORMANCES ENGINE
PERKINS 1106D-ETA - 146 kW
Maximum capacity:....................................................... 16,000 kg Maximum power:.......................... 146 kW (196 hp) at 2,200 rpm
Capacity at maximum height on tyres:.......................... 11,000 kg Type:......................... four-stroke, diesel engine, Common-Rail 12
Capacity at maximum boom extension on tyres:............ 5,000 kg Cylinders number and layout:........................... 6, vertical in line 11
Maximum lifting height on tyres:...................................... 10.20 m Displacement:............ 6,598 cm3 -Turbo compressor aftercooler
Maximum horizontal boom extension:.............................. 5.15 m 10
Cooling system:.................................................................. liquid
Boom extension at maximum height:................................ 0.30 m Specific fuel consumption (2,200 rpm):....................... 230g/kWh 9
Fork tilting angle:...................................................................120° Electronic accelerator. 8
Tearing force:............................................................. 16,200 daN Manual accelerator.
Maximum allowable slope with load:................................... 35 % Air pre-heater for cold climates.
7
Total empty weight:...................................................... 23,700 kg 6
Max speed:..................................................................... 25 km/h
REFUELLING (litre) 5

TRANSMISSION Oil tank:.................................................................................. 300


4

3
Fuel tank:................................................................................ 270
Transmission:................. hydrostatic with variable delivery pump 2
Hydraulic engine:................................ with automatic adjustment
Reversing gear:............................................... electro - hydraulic STANDARD DEVICES 1

Inching pedal for controlled forward movement. 0


Anti-tipping device with block for hazardous movements.
Servocontrolled 2-speed gear box.
Hydraulic socket for possible accessories on boom head. -1
ROPS-FOPS approved closed soundproof cab with heating and -2

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM opening roof. m


Grammer deluxe seat.
Gear Pump:......................................................... 53 l/1' / 200 bar High efficiency cyclone self-cleaning air filter.
Variable delivery pump (Load Sensing):............170 l/1' / 350 bar
Control valve with joystick:.................................................. 4 in 1 TYRES
Simultaneous movements:........................................................ 4
Proportional control distributor “Load Sensing” with “Flow Sharing” Tyres:........................................................................... 18.00 R25 14

13

DIFFERENTIAL AXLES (HEAVY DUTY) 12


OPTIONAL AND ACCESSORIES
11
Steering axles:..................... 2, with planetary reduction gears A/C; Webasto heater; digital speedometer; water heater;
10
Type of steering:..................... 4 wheels / transversal / 2 wheels pneumatic seat suspension; light on boom head; quick
Front axle:...................................................................... levelling attachment for accessories; radio; anti-theft alarm; glass 9
Rear axle:.................................................................... oscillating protection; Reversible fan. 8
Service brake:....................................... oil bath on the 4 wheels (For further customised accessories, please consult your local dealer) 7
Negative parking brake.
6

5
0.6 m 0.6 m 4
SYMBOLS KEY

3
Forks Extender/transfer device Jib Centering 2
with capacity 0.6 m for forks with capacity 0.6 m (Measurements) handler jib
1
L
0
A
-1
DO NOT maneuver m
Winch Hook for if the machine
(Capacity) fork carriage Fixed front basket
is NOT levelled

G/7
Model E.T. HERCULES Technical data

AXB1451/103A
AXB1451/106A
0,6 m
(12.0 ton)

12
11
MAX 16 ton 11 MAX 12 ton
10 10,2
60° E 10 10,15
9 D 60° E
50° C 9 D
8
B 50°
11 8 C

7 A B
40° 10
, 3 7 40° A
6 12 9
6
30°
5 7,2
,1

30° 12
15

5
4
20° 4
16

20°
3 3
4,6

7,3

5,9
2 10° 2 10°
3,3

1 1
5,8

4,8
9,4

0° 0 0°
0
-3°
-3°
-1 -1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 -2
5,3 EN1459
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
4,85
AXB1451/104A

0,6 m
(8.0 ton)

12 AXB1451
11 MAX 8 ton 11

10 10 MAX 16 ton 10,2


10,15
60° 60° E
E
9 D 9 D
50° C 50° C
8 8
B ,5 B
12
7 40° A 7 40° A

6 14
8 6
30° 7,4
5 30°
5
16

4
20° 4
20°
3
3
6
2
6,0

10°
8,8

2 10°
1 5
5,0

1
7,2


11

0

-3° 0
-1
-3°
-1
-2
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
5,15 EN1459
4,85

G/8
215

AXB1451/101A
AXB1451/9A
120

11 13
12,8
MAX 16 ton 10,4 12 MAX 1 ton
10 60° E
D 11
9

= 1000 kg
50° C 10 60° E
8 2,9
B D
1 9
A 50° C
40°

kg
7
,5 8 B
14

+
A
40°
6 7
30°

Max.
16

5 6 30°

4 20° 5

4 20°
3
6,3

9,2

10° 3
2 10°
2
5,3

7,2

11,3

1
1 0°

0 0
-3° -3°
-1 -1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 m 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5,1 6,5
AXB1451/24A

AXB1451/102A
(2.7 m)

14

13 MAX 3 ton 12
12,75 MAX 6 ton
12 60° E 11
10,85
D 60°
10 E
11 50° C D
B 9 50°
10 C
A B
40°
8
9 40° A
7
8 30° 6
3,0

6 30°
7
20° 5
6
20° 5
4
5
10° 3 4,3
4 10°
2
3 3,7
0° 1 0°
2 -3°
0 -3°

1
-1
0 m 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7,12
-1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
4,8

G/9
Model E.T. HERCULES Technical data

G/10
Hercules 210.10
0,6 m

AXB1452
11 11

10 MAX 21 ton 10,2


10
60° E
9 9
D
50° ,5 C 8
8 14
B
,0
16 A 7
7 40° ,5
18
6 6
,0
21
30° 5
5

4 4
20°
3 3

8,0
2

11,5
2 10°

1 1
7,0

9,5

0° 0
0
-3° -1
-1
m
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
5,15 EN1459

PERFORMANCES ENGINE
PERKINS 1106D-ETA - 146 kW
Maximum capacity:....................................................... 21,000 kg Maximum power:.......................... 146 kW (196 hp) at 2,200 rpm
Capacity at maximum height on tyres:..........................14,500 kg Type:............................ four-stroke, diesel engine, Common-Rail 12
Capacity at maximum boom extension on tyres:............ 7,000 kg Cylinders number and layout:........................... 6, vertical in line M
11
Maximum lifting height on tyres:...................................... 10.20 m Displacement:............ 6,598 cm3 -Turbo compressor aftercooler
Maximum horizontal boom extension:.............................. 5.10 m Cooling system:.................................................................. liquid
10
Boom extension at maximum height:................................ 0.20 m Specific fuel consumption (2,200 rpm):....................... 230g/kWh 9
Fork tilting angle:................................................................. 120° Electronic accelerator. 8
Tearing force:............................................................. 18,900 daN Manual accelerator.
Maximum allowable slope with load:................................... 35 % Air pre-heater for cold climates.
7

Total empty weight:...................................................... 27,400 kg 6


Max speed:..................................................................... 25 km/h
REFUELLING (litre) 5

TRANSMISSION 4
Oil tank:..................................................................... 300
3
Transmission:................. hydrostatic with variable delivery pump Fuel tank:................................................................................ 280
2
Hydraulic engine:................................ with automatic adjustment
Reversing gear:............................................... electro - hydraulic STANDARD DEVICES
1

Inching pedal for controlled forward movement. 0


Servocontrolled 2-speed gear box. Anti-tipping device with block for hazardous movements.
-1
Hydraulic socket for possible accessories on boom head.
m
ROPS-FOPS approved closed soundproof cab with heating and
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM opening roof.
Grammer deluxe seat.
Gear Pump:........................................................ 53 l/1' / 200 bar High efficiency cyclone self-cleaning air filter.
Variable delivery pump (Load Sensing):............170 l/1' / 350 bar
Control valve with joystick:.................................................. 4 in 1
Simultaneous movements:........................................................ 4
TYRES
Proportional control distributor “Load Sensing” with “Flow Sharing”
Tyres:............................................................................. 23.5 R25
Lifting piston with “oil regeneration” system. 12

DIFFERENTIAL AXLES (HEAVY DUTY) 11


OPTIONAL AND ACCESSORIES
10
Steering axles:........................ 2, with planetary reduction gears A/C; Webasto heater; digital speedometer; water heater;
9
Type of steering:..................... 4 wheels / transversal / 2 wheels pneumatic seat suspension; light on boom head; quick
Front axle:...................................................................... levelling attachment for accessories; radio; anti-theft alarm; glass 8
Rear axle:.................................................................... oscillating protection; Reversible fan. 7
Service brake:........................................ oil bath on the 4 wheels (For further customised accessories, please consult your local dealer)
6
Negative parking brake.
5

0.6 m 0.6 m 0.9 m 0.9 m 3


SYMBOLS KEY

Forks Extender/transfer device Forks Extender/transfer device Jib 1


with capacity 0.6 m for forks with capacity 0.6 m with capacity 0.9 m for forks with capacity 0.9 m (Measurements)
0
L
-1
A
-2
DO NOT maneuver m
Centering Winch Hook for if the machine
(Capacity) fork carriage Fixed front basket
handler jib is NOT levelled

G/11
Model E.T. HERCULES Technical data

AXB1452/106A
0,6 m 0,9 m

AXB1452/107A
11
11
10 MAX 21 ton 10,2 MAX 20 ton
60° 10 10,2
E 60° E
9 D 9 D
50° ,5 C
8 12 50° ,5 C
B 8 11
,5 B
14 A 3,
0
7 40° ,5 1 A
16 ,0 7 40° ,0
15 ,0
19 17
6 ,0 ,0
21 6
20
30° 30°
5 5
4 4
20° 20°
3 3
6,5

6,0
10,0

2 10°

9,5
2 10°
5,5

1
5,0
1
8,0

7,5
0° 0°
0 0
-3° -3°
-1 -1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 EN1459 m 6 5 4 3 2 1
5,3 5,6 EN1459

AXB1452/104A
AXB1452/103A

(12.0 ton) (8.0 ton)

12
12
MAX 8 ton
11 MAX 12 ton 11

10 10,15
10 10,15 60° E
60° E 9
9 D
D
50° C
50° C 8
8 B
B
7 A 7 40°
A
40°

6 12,0 6 8,0

30° 30°
5 5

4 4
20° 20°

3 3
9,0 2
2 10° 10°

1 6,5 1 6,5

0 0° 0 0°
-3° -3°
-1 -1

-2 -2
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 m 6 5 4 3 2 1
4,85 4,85

G/12
0,6 m 0,9 m

AXB1452/105A
AXB1452
11
11
MAX 21 ton 10 MAX 21 ton 10,2
10 10,2 60°
60° E
E 9
9 D
D
50° ,5 C
50° ,5 C 8 13
8 14 B
B ,0
,0 15
16 A
7 40° ,5
A
7 40° ,5 16
18 ,0
19
6 ,0
6 ,0 21
21 30°
30° 5
5
4
4 20°
20°
3
3

7,5

11,0
8,0

2 10°
11,5

2 10°
1

6,5

9,0
1
7,0

9,5

0 0°
0 0°
-3°
-3° -1
-1 m 6 5 4 3 2 1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 5,45 EN1459
5,15 EN1459

215
AXB1452/9A

AXB1452/101A
120

11 13
12,8
10 MAX 21 ton 10,4 12 MAX 1 ton
60° E
9 D 11 = 1000 kg

50° ,0 C
15 10 60° E
8 5 B
, D
16 A 9
40° ,0 50° C
7 19
kg

8 B
,0
+

6 21 40°
A

30° 7
5
Max.

6 30°

4 20° 5

4 20°
3
8,5

12,0

10° 3
2
10°
2
10,0
7,0

1
0° 1 0°
0
-3° 0
-3°
-1
-1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1 m 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5,1 6,5

G/13
Model E.T. HERCULES Technical data

AXB1452/24A
215

AXB1452/102A
120
(2.7 m)
14
12
13 MAX 3 ton
12,75 11 MAX 6 ton
12 60° E 10,85
D 10 60° E
11 50° C D
B 9 50° C
10
A B
40° 8
9 A
40°
7
8 30° 6,0
3,0

6 30°
7
20° 5
6
20°
5
4
10° 5,0
4 3
10°

3 2

2 -3° 1 0°

0 -3°
1

0 -1
m 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-1 7,1
m 6 5 4 3 2 1
4,8

G/14
ALPHABETICAL INDEX

"A"
ACCESSORY QUICK ATTACHMENT FROM CAB (OPTIONAL)...........................................................................C/39
ACKNOWLEDGING SAFETY REGULATIONS.........................................................................................................B/2
AIR CONDITIONING (OPTIONAL).........................................................................................................................C/41
Air filter.............................................................................................................................................................D/24
AIR RECIRCULATION............................................................................................................................................C/41
Allowed surface pressure........................................................................................................................B/37
ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE..........................................................................................................................................C/30
ASHTRAY................................................................................................................................................................C/10
ATTACHMENT AND OPERATING MODE SELECTION.........................................................................................C/72

"B"
BATTERIES.............................................................................................................................................................B/26
battery isolator switch..............................................................................................................................D/40
Boom head light SWITCH (OPTIONAL)..........................................................................................................C/38
boom sliding blocks......................................................................................................................................D/35
Boom WORK light SWITCH (OPTIONAL).........................................................................................................C/38

"C"
cab...........................................................................................................................................................................C/6
Cab BACK light SWITCH (OPTIONAL)..............................................................................................................C/36
Cab front light SWITCH (OPTIONAL)...........................................................................................................C/36
CAB INSIDE VENTILATION....................................................................................................................................C/40
Capacity of parts to lubricate.................................................................................................................D/12
CATALYTIC PURIFIER (OPTIONAL)......................................................................................................................C/47
CENTRAL DASHBOARD........................................................................................................................................C/53
CENTRAL DASHBOARD - INSTRUMENT USE.....................................................................................................C/16
CENTRAL DASHBOARD PILOT LIGHTS...............................................................................................................C/15
CHECKING THE WIND SPEED..............................................................................................................................B/36
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE.................................................................................................................................B/23
COMPARATIVE OIL TABLE....................................................................................................................................D/12
COMPLEMENTARY WORK DATA READINGS......................................................................................................C/70
Connecting the cables and starting the engine...............................................................................B/28
CONTACT WITH DANGEROUS FLUIDS...............................................................................................................B/31
COURTESY COMPARTMENT................................................................................................................................C/11
CYLINDER BLOCK VALVES...................................................................................................................................D/26

"D"
DASHBOARD LEVERS..........................................................................................................................................C/22
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY..........................................................................................................................A/9
DECLARATION OF FIRST INSPECTION BY MANUFACTURER............................................................................D/5
DECLARATION OF VIBRATORY EMISSIONS.........................................................................................................D/5
DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAYS........................................................................................................................................C/74
DISCONNECTING THE LIMITING DEVICE...........................................................................................................C/31
DISPLAY..................................................................................................................................................................C/68
DOOR OPENING CONTROLS.................................................................................................................................C/8
DRIVER’S CAB.........................................................................................................................................................B/7
DRIVING AUTHORISATIONS...................................................................................................................................B/8
DRIVING CAB.........................................................................................................................................................B/41
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Alphabetical Index

"E"
ECOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS........................................................................................................................B/34
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE................................................................................................................B/18
EMERGENCY EXIT..................................................................................................................................................C/9
EMERGENCY LIGHTS SELECTOR.......................................................................................................................C/37
EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON..............................................................................................................................C/27
ENCODED DISPLAY OF ATTACHMENTS AND OPERATING MODES.................................................................C/72
engine radiator and services....................................................................................................................D/22
Ensuring the vehicle is clean......................................................................................................................B/5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS............................................................................................................................B/9
EQUIPMENT AND OPERATING MODE.................................................................................................................C/71
ERROR LIST...........................................................................................................................................................C/61

"F"
FAST/SLOW SPEED COMMAND...........................................................................................................................C/26
FIRE PREVENTION................................................................................................................................................B/25
FIRST AID.................................................................................................................................................................B/6
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL DECK LEVELING............................................................................................................C/28
FRONT WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH................................................................................................C/37
FUEL TANK.............................................................................................................................................................D/21
fuses....................................................................................................................................................................D/41

"G"
GENERAL ALARM WARNING LIGHT....................................................................................................................C/57
GENERAL INFORMATION......................................................................................................................................C/67
GENERAL MACHINE INFORMATION....................................................................................................................D/51
GENERAL WARNINGS.............................................................................................................................................B/3
GENERAL WARNINGS.............................................................................................................................................C/3
GETTING IN AND OUT OF THE CAB......................................................................................................................C/8
GUARANTEE............................................................................................................................................................A/4

"H"
HOISTING THE MACHINE.....................................................................................................................................B/17

"I"
IDENTIFYING THE VEHICLE PARTS .....................................................................................................................D/6
IGNITION SWITCH.................................................................................................................................................C/20
INITIAL INSPECTION OF DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTATION ...........................................................................C/56
INSPECTING THE VEHICLE....................................................................................................................................B/4
INTERIOR CAB INSTRUMENTS............................................................................................................................C/14
internal cab lamp............................................................................................................................................C/10
INTERNAL DOOR OPENING CONTROLS..............................................................................................................C/8
INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................A/3

"L"
lcd DISPLAY.........................................................................................................................................................C/54
LEARNING ABOUT THE VEHICLE’S PARTS – FOUR MOVEMENT FOOT STABILISERS....................................C/4
Lighting................................................................................................................................................................D/42
LOAD HANDLING...................................................................................................................................................B/14
LOAD HANDLING...................................................................................................................................................B/46
LOAD TABLES........................................................................................................................................................B/42

"M"
MAIN WORK DATA.................................................................................................................................................C/69
MAINTENANCE AND REGISTRATION SCHEDULE................................................................................................D/8
MAINTENANCE PRESCRIPTIONS..........................................................................................................................D/3
MANIPULATOR.......................................................................................................................................................C/29
MANUAL ELECTRONIC ACCELERATOR..............................................................................................................C/37
MAX POWER 180W................................................................................................................................................C/10
MIDAC ALARMS.....................................................................................................................................................C/75
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVERS...................................................................................................................................C/23
"N"
NOISE.....................................................................................................................................................................B/19

"O"
Oilers ..................................................................................................................................................................D/36
OPENING THE DOOR WINDOW ............................................................................................................................C/9
OPENING THE ENGINE BONNET.........................................................................................................................D/14

"P"
PARKING BRAKE...................................................................................................................................................C/25
PARKING BRAKE...................................................................................................................................................D/17
PARKING THE VEHICLE........................................................................................................................................B/15
PEDALS..................................................................................................................................................................C/24
PEDALS..................................................................................................................................................................D/16
PERFORMING MAINTENANCE WORK SAFELY..................................................................................................B/20
PRELOAD AND TORQUE COUPLE TABLE FOR CLASS 2 NUTS AND BOLTS...................................................D/45
PRELOAD AND TORQUE TABLE FOR CLASS 1 NUTS AND BOLTS..................................................................D/44
PREPARATION AFTER PROLONGED INACTIVITY..............................................................................................B/24
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING........................................................................................................................................B/4
PUSH-BUTTONS....................................................................................................................................................C/55

"R"
RADIO CONTROL (optional).............................................................................................................................C/33
REAR WINDOW........................................................................................................................................................C/9
RECOMMENDED FUEL SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................B/32
RECORDING PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE WORK COMPLETED........................................D/53
REDUCERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AXLES.............................................................................................................D/28
REVOLVING LIGHT SWITCH.................................................................................................................................C/36
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD - FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCHES...........................................................C/17
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD - FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCHES...........................................................C/18
RIGHT HAND SIDE DASHBOARD - SELECTOR SWITCHES- PUSH-BUTTONS................................................C/19
ROAD TRAVEL ......................................................................................................................................................B/16
ROAD TRAVEL (INSTRUCTIONS).........................................................................................................................B/16
ROPS-FOPS CAB...................................................................................................................................................B/41

"S"
SAFE OPERATION.................................................................................................................................................B/10
SAFETY DEVICES..................................................................................................................................................B/38
SAFETY STICKERS ..............................................................................................................................................B/50
SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS AND REGISTRATION METHOD............................................................................D/50
SEAT.......................................................................................................................................................................C/12
SEAT BELTS...........................................................................................................................................................C/13
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS AND ALARM MESSAGES...................................................................................................C/73
SERVICE.................................................................................................................................................................C/60
SPIRIT LEVEL.........................................................................................................................................................C/27
STARTING UP THE VEHICLE..................................................................................................................................B/9
STARTING UP WITH AUXILIARY BATTERIES......................................................................................................B/27
STEERING SELECTOR..........................................................................................................................................C/34
STEERING WHEEL (adjustment).....................................................................................................................C/11
STORING DANGEROUS FLUIDS..........................................................................................................................B/31
STORING THE MACHINE / PROLONGED INACTIVITY........................................................................................B/24
Mod. E.T. HERCULES Alphabetical Index

"T"
TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POCKET............................................................................................................C/11
TELESCOPIC LIFT IDENTIFICATION......................................................................................................................A/7
TEMPORARY HALT................................................................................................................................................B/15
TIGHTENING WHEEL NUTS..................................................................................................................................B/29
TORQUE TABLE OF HYDRAULIC FITTINGS........................................................................................................D/46
TOWING THE VEHICLE.........................................................................................................................................C/42
TRANSDUCER CONGRUENCY ALARM...............................................................................................................C/78
TRANSDUCERS ANGLE, EXTENSION AND PRESSURE ALARM.......................................................................C/78
TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE..........................................................................................................................B/17
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................................................D/47
TYRES....................................................................................................................................................................B/29

"U"
Upper ROOF.........................................................................................................................................................C/10
USING THE LOAD TABLES AND BOOM INDICATORS........................................................................................B/43

"V"
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION......................................................................................................................................A/6
VERIFICATION ANTI-TIPPING DEVICE.................................................................................................................C/31
VIBRATIONS...........................................................................................................................................................B/18

"W"
WASTE DISPOSAL.................................................................................................................................................B/34
WATER PURIFIER (OPTIONAL).............................................................................................................................C/47
Hercules

OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hercules - INGLESE

AXH1139/UK
Servizio Assistenza Tecnica - Via E. Majorana, 2-4 - 42027 Montecchio Emilia (RE) ITALY Via E. Majorana, 2-4
Tel. +39 0522 869611 - Fax S.A.T. +39 0522 869744 42027 Montecchio Emilia (RE) ITALY
www.dieci.com - E-mail: service@dieci.com Tel. +39 0522 869611 Fax +39 0522 869744 ATTENTION: ALWAYS KEEP A COPY OF THIS MANUAL
www.dieci.com - E-mail: info@dieci.com ON THE MACHINE AT THE OPERATOR’S DISPOSAL

You might also like